JP6742649B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball is won at a starting opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

With such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a design, or the like.

JP, 2016-202930, A JP, 2016-198339, A JP, 2016-182376, A

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can be notified whether or not the hit,
By a look-ahead during the change, a first effect in which a specific decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one decorative design of the set of decorative designs,
After the first effect, during the change before the change corresponding to the look-ahead, the second effect in which the specific decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as all the decorative symbols of the set of decorative symbols When,
After the second presentation, during the change corresponding to the look-ahead, the image corresponding to the image represented by the specific decorative pattern is displayed without temporarily displaying the specific decorative pattern as the set of decorative patterns. And a third effect in which is displayed can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, amusement of a game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sub-control board side of the gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating a main ROM and a main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination table T1-T4, T10. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric power channel opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory view of a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flow chart of main side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 prior determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 prior determination process. It is a flow chart of normal operation processing. It is a flow chart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors product processing. It is a flow chart of V opening and closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flow chart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flow chart which shows sub-control main processing. 7 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a prefetch effect determination process. It is a figure for explaining the composition of a prior judgment information storage area. It is an explanatory view of a prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flow chart of variation production start processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a core effect pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing during fluctuation production. It is a flow chart of display control processing. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the upward movement of the left sub display apparatus 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the right rotation of the left sub display apparatus 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the left sub display apparatus 10L. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated upward movement of the right sub display device 10R. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the left rotation of the right sub display apparatus 10R. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the right sub display apparatus 10R. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of upward movement of the left and right sub display devices 10. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the advancing movement of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the rotation operation of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the rotation operation of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st combination production of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd combination production of the 1st and 2nd movable accessory. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub display apparatus interlocking production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display apparatus interlocking production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display apparatus interlocking production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub display apparatus interlocking production D. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design fluctuation stop production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design fluctuation stop production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design fluctuation stop production C. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design fluctuation stop production D. It is an explanatory view illustrating a special variation effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation production B. It is an explanatory view illustrating a special variation effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the special variation production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the character display production D. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated selective production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated selective production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated selective production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the selection effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the multiple image pseudo continuous production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the multiple image pseudo continuous production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the multiple image pseudo continuous production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the multiple image pseudo continuous production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated image display production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the image display effect D. It is an explanatory view illustrating a sub display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub display production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the sub-display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated holding arrangement direction change production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated reservation arrangement direction change production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated reservation arrangement direction change production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated holding arrangement direction change production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold display effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reservation movement production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated reservation movement production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated reservation movement production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold|maintenance movement production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the said information display production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the said information display production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the said information display production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the said information display production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold|maintenance icon interlocking production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold|maintenance icon interlocking production B. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a hold icon linked effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the hold icon interlocking production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pending|holding change suggestion production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated pending change suggestion production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the suspension change suggestion production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the pending|holding change suggestion production D. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design display mode production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design display mode production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design display mode production C. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative symbol display mode effect D. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design fluctuation production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design fluctuation production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design fluctuation production C. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design fluctuation production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated pseudo continuous production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated pseudo continuous production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated pseudo continuous production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated pseudo continuous production D. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design opposite production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design opposite production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative pattern opposite production C. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design opposite production D. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative pattern prefetch display effect A. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative pattern prefetch display effect B. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative pattern prefetch display effect C. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative pattern prefetch display effect D. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design pre-reading production A. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative pattern prefetching effect B. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative pattern prefetching effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the decorative pattern prefetching effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image inclination display effect A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated operation image inclination display production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image inclination display effect C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the operation image inclination display effect D. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design button stop production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design button stop production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated decorative design button stop production C. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative symbol button stop effect D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated icon display production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated icon display production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated icon display production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated icon display production D. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated production execution decision production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated production execution decision production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated production execution decision production C. It is the explanation drawing which exemplifies production execution decision production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated reach development selection production A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated reach development selective production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the reach development selection production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated two-way group production A. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated two-way group production B. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated two-way group production C. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the two-way group production D. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the acquisition payout display effect A. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated acquisition payout display production B. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated acquisition payout display production C. It is the explanation drawing which illustrated acquisition payout display production D.

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 is described as being the same as the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that shoots a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball is won in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell of the gaming machine and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 53 and shoots a game ball with a shooting strength according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the ball hitting supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of effect executed as the game progresses. The frame lamp 66 is arranged above the front frame 53 and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the front frame 53, and perform sound effects during a game or the like.

The game board 2, a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, a main display device 7, a sub display device 10, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, a fixed winning device (belt) 19, Ordinary variable winning device (den Chu) 22, gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, second big winning device (second attacker) 36, big winning opening start The mouth 17, the general winning opening 27 (ordinary winning opening 27), the outlet 16, and the display device 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where the game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails that guide the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3, and guides the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 toward above the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp 66R and the left frame lamp 66L so that the form and the light emission are continuous.

The main display device 7 is an image display device provided near the center of the game area 3 and having a display screen 7a. The main display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display).

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. A left effect design (left decorative design) 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area. In the middle symbol display area, a medium effect symbol (medium decorative symbol) 8C is displayed. The right effect design (right decorative design) 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The main display device 7 is a combination of effect symbols displayed in the symbol display areas of the left, middle, and right, and a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display device 41a and a second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when the big hit is won, the effect design is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a gap of "637" or the like. This makes it easy for the player to understand the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the main display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or a mode other than that may be used. The combination of the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect for displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "effect symbol variation effect", "decorative symbol variation effect", or simply "variation effect" "variable display". In addition, the variation effect of this decorative symbol counts the effect in the period from the start to the stop of the special symbol (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) as one variation effect (variation effect of one cycle). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative symbol.

The main display device 7 can display, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect, a big hit effect performed in parallel with a big hit game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like on the display screen 7a. In the effect symbol variation effect, effect images such as background images and character images may be displayed in addition to effect symbols. Further, the main display device 7, in addition to the effect symbol, an identification display capable of suggesting that the special symbol is changing or suggesting a lottery result of the special symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The sub display device 10 includes a left sub display device 10L and a right sub display device 10R, which are image display devices arranged in front of the main display device 7, respectively. Each of the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R is a movable gimmick having a display screen, and the position and orientation of the display screen can be changed by a mechanism unit (not shown). Like the main display device 7, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R may be liquid crystal display devices, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, and a dot matrix. May be The left sub display device 10L is arranged at the lower left of the main display device 7 and has a first reserved image display area in which the reserved image 9A is displayed. In the first reserved image display area, the reserved image 9A is displayed according to the number of stored first special figure reservations described later. The right sub display device 10R is arranged at the lower right of the main display device 7, and has a second reserved image display region in which the reserved image 9B is displayed and a reserved digested image display region in which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. doing. have. In the second reserved image display area, the reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of stored second special figure reservations described later. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digested image 9C is an image representing the hold and is also referred to as the hold image 9C or the hold icon 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to as simply the hold icon. Due to the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure reservations displayed on a first special figure reservation display 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b. It is possible to display the number of memories of the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect design (effect design 8L, 8C, 8R) that is currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen of the sub-display device 10, and by the display of the reserved digestion image 9C, the first special feature is displayed. It can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the figure reservation or the second special figure reservation is exhausted (“digest of special figure reservation” described later).

On the left side and the right side of the main display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14) which is a movable so-called gimmick is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two left and right semicircular members are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the left and right retracted positions (FIG. 1) of the main display device 7, and moves so as to approach each other from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a ( (Advance), and can stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 53 to 55). The first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the upper side of the main display device 7, a second plate movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15) that is a movable so-called gimmick is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration portion) described as “OARO” is vertically movable. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retreat position above the main display device 7 (FIG. 1), and is moved (advanced) downward from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a (FIGS. 56 to 59). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the main display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed below the sub display device 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting opening 20 described later. A warp unit 12 is provided on the left side of the sub display device 10. The warp unit 12 has an inlet portion into which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion from which the game ball flows out, and causes the game ball flowing from the inlet portion to flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 is visible through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the images displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 are visible through the illumination panel 18. There is. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on the main surface by irradiating the LED light from the end surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several kinds of images in plural kinds of colors depending on the irradiation direction of the light of the LED and the color difference.

The fixed winning device (belly) 19 is arranged below the main display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning opening) in which the ease of entering a game ball does not always change Port, fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is an opportunity to obtain a big hit random number or the like and to make a big hit judgment.

The normal variable winning device (electric Chu) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second winning opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is a trigger for the lottery for the second special symbol (small hit and big hit lottery). The power tube 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the operation of the movable member 23 opens and closes the second starting port 21. The movable member 23 is driven by the electric power solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The 2nd starting opening 21 can enter a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It should be noted that, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, it is easier for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 than when the movable member 23 is in the closing state. It may be possible to enter.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the ordinary symbol lottery that determines whether or not to open the electric Chu 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (random number per hit) and the hit determination.

Here, the "special symbol jackpot lottery" means that when the game ball wins the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a jackpot random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained jackpot random number is obtained. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to a predetermined “big hit”. The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and the predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped (fixed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. On the main display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. This symbol matching game more effectively informs the player of the jackpot lottery result.

Further, "small winning lottery for special symbols" means that when the game ball wins the second starting opening 21, a small winning random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired small winning random number is predetermined. It is a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made by comparing with a value corresponding to "small hit". The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display device 41b described later, and when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, the lottery is performed. The special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is informed of the lottery result. On the main display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. This symbol matching game more effectively informs the player of the result of the small hit lottery. ..

Further, "ordinary symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for ordinary symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not there is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not notified immediately, but the normal symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol, and the predetermined variation is obtained. When the time has elapsed, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lit or extinguished), and the player is informed of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30 , V area 39, non-V area 70, and V opening/closing member 71. The first big winning opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of the game ball by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first special winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first big winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first big winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3) inside. , A first special winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured inside the first big winning device 31 as areas through which the game balls that have passed through the first big winning opening 30 can pass. .. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening/closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to play the game ball. It becomes the 1st state (rotation state) which distributes to V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it becomes the 2nd state (stop state) which is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to non-V area 70. .. The V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of allocating the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V open/close member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 (first state), and when the V open/close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70. It may be configured to be in the (second state). In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive variation operating port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 does not serve as the probability variation operating port. The first big prize device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big prize device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small hitting attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening). It has a winning hole) 35. The second special winning opening 35 is provided with an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows the acceptance of the game ball by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second special winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second winning hole 35 allows game balls to enter when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. This second big winning device is a small hit attacker that operates when a game ball wins the second starting opening 21 and is won in a small hit lottery.

The special winning opening opening start port 17 is arranged above the first special winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first special winning opening 30 is opened when a game ball passes.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The outlet 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges the game balls that have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display device 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side and a right game area 3B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the way of striking the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". With the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning a prize in the first starting opening 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, the player can aim to pass to the gate 28, hit the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35 by hitting with a right stroke.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display device 40. The display devices 40 are a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, an ordinary symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , A universal figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The 1st special symbol reservation indicator 43a displays the memory number of the operation reservation (1st special symbol reservation) of the 1st special symbol indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memories of the operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special symbol indicator 41b. The universal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of memories of the operation hold (universal figure hold) of the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. In the following, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbol”. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". In addition, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation indicator 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then stops the display to draw a lottery (big hit lottery) based on the winning of the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21. Notify the result. The special symbol that is stopped (stop symbol, a special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol of a predetermined jackpot stop mode (jackpot symbol), the first big winning opening 30 in the open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (stopped jackpot type) that is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second special winning opening 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the special winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second special winning opening 35) in the jackpot game will be described later.

After the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed (variable display), the special symbol display unit 41 displays the result of the lottery (small hit lottery) based on the winning of the second starting opening 21 by displaying the stop. The special symbol that is stopped (stop symbol, a special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol of a predetermined small hit stop mode (small hit symbol), a special game (small hit game) for opening the second special winning opening 35 in a predetermined opening pattern is performed. The opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win the jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: unlit) from the left. , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit and the jackpot pattern is displayed. When the small hit is won, the small hit pattern in which the first and second LEDs from the left are turned on is displayed such as "○○●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: unlit). In the case of a loss, a lost pattern in which only the LED on the far right is turned on, such as "●●●●●●●○", is displayed. You may employ|adopt the aspect which turns off all the LEDs as a loss design. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variation time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins (winning) into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, the values (numerical value information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the winning , And is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a winning in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special drawing reservation, and if it is a winning in the second starting opening 21. , Is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in this embodiment are the same for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is exhausted when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special figure hold" means determining a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold, and executing variable display of the special symbol for indicating the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even when a prize is won during or during the execution of a special game, the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as an upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are respectively constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on the LEDs by the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 indicates the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying (variable display) the normal symbol and then displaying the stop. The ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed (ordinary symbol stopped symbol, the ordinary symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. If the normal figure stop symbol is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stopping mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting opening 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern in which both LEDs are turned on is displayed such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as the normally lost pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be alternately turned on. The mode of variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the ordinary symbol random number (random number per hit) acquired for the passage is stored in the universal figure reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as the ordinary figure reservation. Once remembered. There is an upper limit to the number of universal figure reservations that can be stored in the universal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The universal figure reservation stored in the universal figure reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbols based on the general figure reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the universal figure hold means that the normal symbol random number (random number per hit) corresponding to the universal figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game, the prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of universal figure reservations is displayed on the universal figure reservation indicator 44. The universal figure pending indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of universal figure pending by turning on the LEDs for the number of universal figure pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 ( 4) and the payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls a game profit such as a big hit lottery and a game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 for storing a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 for executing the program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a special winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17a, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first special winning opening sensor 30a, a The two major winning opening sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric power solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The special winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17a is provided inside the special winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the special winning opening opening starting opening 17. The first starting opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting opening 20 and detects a game ball that has won the first starting opening 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27 and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The electric Chu solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric Chu 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

The display device 40 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, an ordinary symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, a second special symbol reservation display device 43b, a general symbol reservation device. The display of the display 44 is controlled.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. To the payout control board 110, the prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. Based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81, the payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. Based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1, the payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the ball dispensing device 130 to pay out the ball. The balls to be paid out are detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information on ball lending based on information on the inserted prepaid card or the like. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launch device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed as a communication direction restricting means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub that executes the program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 is included. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The production control microcomputer 91 transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via the input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L, right sub display device 10R) according to a program. Do it. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols. Image data such as a background image and the like (including effect patterns) are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the voice control board 106 to output voice, music, and sound effects based on the command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be mounted with a CPU, and the CPU may execute voice control based on a command. Furthermore, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The sub display device 10, the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107 and control these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 through the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. In other words, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting/extinguishment, light emission color, etc., lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and the light emission pattern. The light emission of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the sub display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The production control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the sub display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15, and according to the operation pattern data, The operations of the sub-display device 10, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are controlled. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessory members 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed.

3. Data Structure of Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining the storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

In the main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)), a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, an ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, an ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric Chu opening pattern determination table T7, the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9, and the small hit determination table T10 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

In the main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)), a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation storage A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main process (described later). A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and it is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, A small hit flag, a V flag, a probability variation flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area in which counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, and random number counters, round counters, probability variation counters, time saving counters, and the like are set therein. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation processing described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reserved information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, a first random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The universal figure reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reserved information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth universal figure reservations, respectively. There are provided a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the sub-display device 10 and the movable accessories 14, 15. A drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, the core effect pattern determination table T52, the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 are stored in the sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A). .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific content of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit side is stored in a sub-control main process (described later), and includes a pre-determination command, a reserved ball count command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting standby command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main processing (described later) ( The output buffer), a variation effect start command, a variation before command, a variation effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter setting area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main processing (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, a general figure hold effect counter. , A probabilistic effect counter, a time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the production control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. Game control microcomputer 81, "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "normal design random number (random number per hit)", "small hit random number" Is acquired at the timing described later. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for lottery (big hit determination) whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning big hit type (big hit type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach random number" is a random number that is used to determine whether to generate a reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is a loss, and a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take Reach is a state in which the effect symbol that is variably displayed among the plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols) is the remaining one, and it depends on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “7↓7”) in which a combination of effect symbols showing a big hit is achieved. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (random number per hit)" is used in a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric Chu 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The “small hitting random number” is a random number used for lottery (small hitting determination) whether or not it is a small hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variable pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21. The “small hitting random number” is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21. The random value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “ordinary symbol random number (random number per hit)” is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the universal symbol holding storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the "look-ahead effect random number" and the "chance up random number" at the timing described later. The “lookahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the lookahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “prefetch effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the preliminary determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance up random number” is acquired based on the fluctuation start command being output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C). Shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hitting determination table T3, FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8(E). , A diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10 is shown.

The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "jackpot" or "miss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined to be a “jackpot” (about probability 1/397), and the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”. It is shown that in the case of a numerical value other than (165 to 65535)”, it is determined as “miss”. Further, in the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined to be a “jackpot” (about probability 1/101), and the jackpot random number value is a value other than “0 to 649 (650 ~65535)", it is indicated that "missing" is determined. The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In addition, this reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the obtained jackpot random number value corresponds to the “jackpot”. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and the reach random number value is a value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 127)” indicates that “no reach” is determined. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and when the reach random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Is shown to be determined as “no reach”. The contents of the “time saving state” and the “non-time saving state” will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach in the short time state is less likely to be reached in the lost state than in the non-time save state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reachless loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

Ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), the normal symbol random value obtained (any of 0-255) corresponds to "win" or "miss" It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to do. In FIG. 8(C), in the “non-time saving state”, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 2”, it is determined to be “win”, and the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 2” (3 ~255)" is determined to be "miss". Further, in the “time saving state”, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 254”, it is determined as “win”, and when the normal symbol random number value is “a number other than 0 to 254 (255)” , "Loss" is determined.

Normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), depending on the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state), determines how many seconds the variation time of the normal symbol It is a table that is referred to in order. In FIG. 8(D), in the "non-time saving state", the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time saving state", the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "1 second". Is shown.

In the small hitting determination table T10, in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81, the small hitting random number value (any one of 0 to 127) acquired corresponds to "small hit" or "miss". It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to do. It should be noted that the small hitting determination table T10 is not referred to when the acquired big hit random number value corresponds to the "big hit". In FIG. 8E, in all states (regardless of game state), when the small hit random number value is "0 to 63", it is determined as "small hit" (probability 1/2), and small hit randomness. It is shown that when the numerical value is “numerical value other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127)”, it is determined as “miss”. The small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 21 (not referred to when the game ball is winning in the first starting opening 20). The small hit determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when it is determined to be a “big hit”.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is, in the main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81, in accordance with the obtained jackpot type random number value (one of 0 to 127), "type of jackpot" and "special symbol". It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when the big hit type random number value is “0 to 24” when the lottery for the first special symbol (special map 1) is won, it is determined that the big hit type is “16RV planned big hit”, The stop symbol 1 (special symbol stop symbol) is determined as "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when the jackpot type random number value is “0 to 40” when the second special symbol (special map 2) is selected in the lottery, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing planned jackpot”, The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "41 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing planned jackpot", and the stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of special figure 2 is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". .. When the jackpot type random number value is “83 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", "ending (ED)" of special game The "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (actual 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passed jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the variation pattern in accordance with the obtained variation pattern random value (0 to 127). .. In FIG. 10, for example, in the non-time saving state, the first start opening 20 is won, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be “miss”, the reach determination table T2 is determined to be “reach”, and the number of reserved balls is “1”. It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P7” when the fluctuation pattern random value is “0 to 60”. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the holding of the second starting port 21 is exhausted (because it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 21 in the non-time saving state, the time saving state (high accurate high base state) ends and the normal state (non (Time saving state, low-probability low base state), the second starting port 21 is released), the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be a “jackpot”, and the jackpot type determination table T5 is a “16RV passing planned jackpot”. , "Big hit symbol 2 (21H)", and the variation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the variation pattern is determined to be "P22". In addition, in the non-time saving state, the suspension of the second starting opening 21 is exhausted, it is determined as “small hit” in the small hit determination table T10, and when the variation pattern random value is “0 to 127”, the variation pattern is “ P34” is shown.

In FIG. 11, for example, in the time saving state, the player wins the first starting opening 20, is determined as “miss” in the jackpot determination table T1, is determined as “no reach” in the reach determination table T2, and the number of reserved balls is “3 to 4” and the variation pattern random value is “0 to 127”, the variation pattern is determined to be “P56”. In addition, in the time saving state, the second winning opening 21 is won, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be a “jackpot”, and the jackpot type determination table T5 is determined to be a “16RV scheduled jackpot” and a “jackpot symbol 2 (21H)”. When the random number value of the variation pattern is "0 to 127", the variation pattern is determined to be "P62". In addition, in the time saving state, the player wins the second starting opening 21, is determined to be “small hit” in the small hit determination table T10, and when the variation pattern random value is “0 to 127”, the variation pattern is “P74”. It is shown to be judged.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the hold of the second starting opening 21 is exhausted and it is determined that the small hit, the variation pattern is determined to be "P34", and the variation time is determined to be 15000 msec. In addition, when the second starting opening 21 is won in the time saving state and it is determined that a small hit is made, the variation pattern is determined to be "P74", and the variation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high accuracy high base state), it is also during the small hit rush (RUSH) period described below until the next big hit, that is, during the small hit rush period, when the second start opening 21 is won. Since the variation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small hits frequently occur in a short time. Then, during the small hit rush period, it is possible to aim for a big hit while increasing the number of game balls on hand. In addition, when the reach is reached, it is also determined whether the reach becomes the normal reach or the super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production in which the variation time after reach is longer than in normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, the normal reach is performed and then the development is executed. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, whether or not there is a pseudo link. In particular, SP5 is a variation pattern of the exclusive reach in which the pseudo jackpot suggestion is performed by winning the second starting opening 21 during the small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in the time saving state (high-accurate high base state) described later ( "P62"). Note that SP5 also occurs during the hold exhaustion of the second starting opening 21 when the time saving state (high accuracy high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state, low accuracy low base state) is reached. In some cases, a pseudo jackpot suggestion effect may be performed (variation pattern “P22”).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric charge opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is a referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the power cable 22 is determined to be the “open pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the open pattern is determined to be the “open pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. In FIG. 12B, the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12 are shown. In the opening pattern 11, the power tube 22 is opened with the number of opening times of 1 and the opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the number of times of opening is 3, the opening time of each time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric Chu 22 is closed even if the opening time remains, when there is a predetermined number of winning game balls (specified winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main processing (described later), according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9), the first special winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening It is a table referred to in order to determine the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13(A), as the special winning opening opening pattern in the jackpot game, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the first special winning opening 30 and The opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 is determined as "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the first special winning opening 30 and the second big winning The opening pattern of the mouth 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is "opening pattern 23". It is shown to be judged. Further, in FIG. 13A, as the special winning opening opening pattern in the small hitting game, when the special figure stop symbol data is “20H”, the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 is determined to be the “opening pattern 25”. It is shown that when the special figure stop symbol data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 is determined to be the "opening pattern 26".

FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22 and the opening pattern 23 as the special winning opening opening pattern in the jackpot game. In the opening pattern 21, the first big winning opening 30 with the opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening number is once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second special winning opening 35 having an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds, and the first special winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) in the 1st to 13Rth, and the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 14th to 16Rth. The second special winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first special winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) once for 15 seconds and the opening time is 0.1 second. .. In the opening pattern 23, the first special winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) with the opening number of 1 time and the opening time of 29.5 seconds at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening number of 1 times and the opening time at the 14th round. The second special winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and the second special winning opening 35 is opened (long opening) once at 16R and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. .. However, the opening of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35, even if the opening time remains, if there is a predetermined number of winning game balls (regular winning number, maximum 9) Will be closed.

FIG. 13C shows the contents of the opening pattern 25 and the opening pattern 26 as the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hitting game. In the opening pattern 25, the second special winning opening 35 having the opening number of once and the opening time of 1.0 second is opened. In the opening pattern 26, the number of times of opening is 5, and the second special winning opening 35 is opened with the opening time of 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is not opened, but only the second big winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern 25, when the "16RV scheduled big hit" by the big hit pattern 1 (20H) of special figure 2, during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game, and the second after the end of the small hit rush The holding of the starting port 21 is performed during digestion. The opening pattern 26, when the "16RV passing planned jackpot" by the jackpot pattern 2 (21H) of special figure 2, during the jackpot rush period after the jackpot game is finished, and the second start opening after the jackpot rush is finished 21 reservations are made during digestion. That is, the opening pattern 26 is a small hitting game performed after the big hitting game when the big hitting is achieved via a variation pattern (“P62”) of a dedicated reach (SP5) in which a pseudo big hitting suggestive effect described later is performed. It has an open pattern. In other words, the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hitting game is different when the jackpot is achieved via the pseudo jackpot suggesting effect and when the jackpot is not achieved via the pseudo jackpot suggesting effect.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the main control main processing (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “20H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be the “opening pattern 31”, When the special figure stop pattern data is "13H", the release pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop pattern data is "14H", the release pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", the special figure It is shown that when the stop symbol data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be the "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won at the first special winning opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th Rs, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V open/close member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second winning occurs, the opening time is increased. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth openings, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th Rs, when the first prize is received at the first big winning opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time with the opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is received, the opening time is opened. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is at the first special winning opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds and the second prize is won. At this time, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R's, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. ..

4. Explanation of big hit etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" as a result of big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, you open the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped (type of big winning) Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is finished. There is. Each round game is started by the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ended by the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. If you win the small hit, the "small hit game" is executed to open the special winning opening (the second big winning opening 35) in the opening pattern according to the kind of big hit that triggered the occurrence of the small hit rush described later. It

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, namely, “V-passing jackpot” and “V non-passing jackpot”.
The "V passing planned jackpot (probable variation jackpot)" is an opening/closing member 32, an opening/closing member 37, and a V opening/closing member in an opening pattern (V passing planned opening pattern) that allows a game ball to pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates 71. In addition, the "V passing planned jackpot (probable variation jackpot)" is a high-probability-high base state in the gaming state after the jackpot game is over until the next jackpot game is started, and during that period, the second start opening 21 is set. It is a small hit rush period where frequent wins and small hits occur. Here, the special figure stop design data 11H ~ 14H, 20H, 21H jackpot corresponds to "V passing planned jackpot (probable variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), it is possible to pass the game ball to the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing big hit (normal big hit)" is an opening/closing member 32, an opening/closing member 37, and an opening/closing member 32 in an opening pattern (V non-passing opening pattern) in which a game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the big hit game. This is a jackpot for activating the V opening/closing member 71. The "V non-passing jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a low-probability low-base state after the end of the jackpot game, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 21 during that period. The small hit rush period does not occur after the big hit game ends. Here, the special figure stop design data 15H, 22H jackpot corresponds to the "V non-passing jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area during the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass to 39.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V passage scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passage scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV scheduled passing jackpot”, “16R (actual 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot”, and “16R (actual 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot”. The “16RV scheduled jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. 1R to 13R and 15R open the first special winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second special winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" has a total round number of 16R, but the substantial total round number is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and with 14R. Even in 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing big jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of the actual 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and the passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The “16R (actual 15R) V scheduled jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. The second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing big jackpot", 14R is a round in which a special winning opening is extremely short and a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 15R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of substantially 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The “V non-passing jackpot” is the “16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot” of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and with 14R. Even in 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" is a jackpot of the actual 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, but its opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery for the first special symbol (special map 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the planned V passing jackpot (jacket with a small hit rush), V The non-passing jackpot is 60/128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery for the second special symbol (special map 2) is that the planned V passing jackpot (small hit rush with jackpot) is 83/128 (about 64.8%), V non-passing planned The jackpot is 45/128 (about 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, rather than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol), which is performed by winning the game ball in the first starting opening 20, the jackpot is played by winning the game ball in the second starting opening 21. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Explanation of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high-probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and probability variation The states that are not controlled are simply called "normal probability states (non-high probability states, low probability states, normal states)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is higher in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state, as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher jackpot probability than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not executed, by the special symbol display 41 The probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is high.

In addition, the state where the game control microcomputer 81 controls the variation time for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called "time saving state", and the state where the variation time reduction control is not performed is simply "non-time saving state". Say. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shorter than the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined such that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more frequently in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the variable time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variation time reduction control is not executed, the special symbol is variable. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure reservation is exhausted is increased, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) to the starting opening is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control at the same time for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment is shown in which the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control are simultaneously executed.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as a probability variation control of the normal symbol, the number of ordinary symbol random value (per random number value) determined to be a hit is more in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. Using FIG. 8(C), a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not executed, by the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal symbol is a hit symbol becomes high. In the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control for the electric Chu 22. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display device 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the power tube 22 is frequently opened, and the game ball is frequently won in the second starting opening 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state where these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. It should be noted that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning by the electric starting 22 to the second starting opening 21) is being executed. The high base state (electric power assist control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22 It suffices to execute the one or more controls so that the power tube 22 is opened more easily than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric power control state) may be independently controlled without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V passing planned jackpot is a high-probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the V area 39 is passed during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy high-base state" or a "high-accuracy short-time state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed 10,000 times. In other words, the high-probability-high base state is actually ended by winning the next big hit (next big hit) and executing the big hit game. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V non-passing jackpot is the normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V area 39 is passed during the jackpot game. State, that is, a state with low probability), a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric power support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low accurate low base state". The low-probability low-base state may be referred to as a "normal game state" or a "low-probability non-time saving state (also simply referred to as non-time saving state)". When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is this low accurate low base state. Although not implemented in this example, there are also normal probable states (non-high-probability states, that is, low-probability states), time-saving states, and high base states (electric support control states). Probable high base state", "low accurate short time state" (state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is called "specific game state"). In addition, a state during execution of the special game (big hit game) may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)".

In a high base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by entering the game ball into the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handing. The electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, the player strikes right to win the game ball to the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings (winnings to the second starting opening 21) and to frequently generate a small hit, as compared with a left-handed hit. In the gaming machine 1, the right-handed game is played even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handing. This is because, in the low electric power base state, the electric power support control is not executed, so that the electric power chewing 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high power base state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 21. This is because winning the first starting opening 20 is easier than winning the second starting opening 21. From this, in the low base state, a left hit is performed in order to win the game ball to the first starting opening 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings (winnings in the first starting opening 20) rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to win/loss determination means (FIG. 23) and win/loss advance determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, status, counter, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7(A). , Normal symbol random number value, small hit random number value) is incremented by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC and the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period (for example, 4 msec period). Then, after the main-side timer interrupt processing is completed, until the next main-side timer interrupt processing is started, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number updating process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the main-side timer interrupt processing execution period and other periods (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main-side timer interrupt processing). And both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of the winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81, the start mouth sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), hold ball The numerical processing (step S107) is sequentially executed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the number of reserved balls is reached, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub control board 90. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the special figure 2 reserved sphere number described later, and the first special figure based on the special figure 1 reserved sphere number. The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode showing the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. When the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The normal symbol holding sphere number is the number of ordinary figures held, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of held figures. If the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of normal symbol holding balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol holding balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value from the first to the general figure reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol holding balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the second starting opening 21. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won in the second starting opening 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved number of balls is the number of second special figure reserved, more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is below 3 (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the special figure 2 reservation sphere number (step S207), special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing is done (step. S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label -TRND-RC value), fluctuation pattern random number counter value (Fig. 7: label-TRND-T1 value), and small hit random number counter value (Fig. 7: label-TRND-K value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 holding sphere number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special diagram reservation storage area 85b for the later-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18). Memory (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 prior determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 20. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not been won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: NO), this processing ends. When the game ball wins the first starting opening 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" ( Step S211). The special figure 1 reserved sphere number is the number of the first special figure reserved, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this processing ends. When the number of special sphere 1 reserved spheres is “3” or less (step S211: NO), after adding “1” to the number of special sphere 1 reserved spheres (step S212), a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in accordance with the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved sphere number among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special diagram reserved storage area 85a for the later-described special diagram 1 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 19). Memory (hold). After the special figure 1-related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination processing (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 prior determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-judgment process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot pre-determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to refer to and a jackpot random number value to make a pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since the high probability state (probability variation flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81, among the jackpot determination table T1, the table for high probability state (big hit determination value "0" to "649") Refer to and judge beforehand whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the jackpot is pre-determined, and when it is any other value, the "miss" is pre-determined. In the present embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed by using the big hit judgment table T1 used in the big hit judgment process (FIG. 23) described later. The pre-judgment may be performed by using the jackpot judgment table.

When the result of the jackpot pre-determination is “miss” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly, the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-judgment of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined to be a "16RV scheduled jackpot". In addition, in the present embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the jackpot type determination table T5 different from the jackpot type determination table T5 is used. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a variation pattern pre-determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly, a variation pattern random value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), Also, the reach random number value is acquired. Next, here, since the time saving state (time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 for time saving state (FIG. 11), and the jackpot pre-determination result of step S304, The variation pattern is specified from the reach presence/absence pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the variation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all the fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-judgment result and the reach presence/absence pre-judgment result, the reach loss is pre-judged, and when the variation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls is "1-2. If the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4," the change pattern "P64" is selected. If the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4," the change pattern "P68" is selected. In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for the preliminary determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a big hit), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created preliminary determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special figure 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned Toku-zu 2 pre-determination processing, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot pre-determination (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 1-related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability variation flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81, in the jackpot determination table T1, the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164. It is pre-judged based on "). That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", the jackpot is pre-determined, and when it is any other value, the "miss" is pre-determined. Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. After that, the processes of steps S404 to S408 are similar to those of steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the power cable 22 is operating (step S501). If the power cable 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the power switch 22 is not operating (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the normal symbol reserved number of balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 in the state where the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is once "1" in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). , And then the holding is digested in this step S504 and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes “0”. This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting mouth sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols becomes “1” once, and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, a random number random symbol value as a determination value stored in the first storage area of the universal figure reservation storage area 86 (corresponding to the first universal figure reservation) ( The random number per hit) is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used. For example, in the non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is determined as "winning", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined as "miss". (See FIG. 8C).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether it is a time saving state), and using the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the normal symbol variation Select the variation time of the normal pattern as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8(D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern to start the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The variation time of the normal symbol is the variation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). When the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and in the case of “miss” in the hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the hit determination is “win” (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a power-chu open pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric Chu 22 is selected with reference to the electric Chu opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric-chuo operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this processing.

In the above-mentioned step S501, when the electric Chu 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric Chu 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is to be closed. It means that one of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the power tube 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the power cable 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric Chu 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric Chu 22 to stop its operation (Step S521), and this processing To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing regarding the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is "1" of the "special operation status", Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, a big hit judgment, a small hit judgment, a variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol changing process, the change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, the output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric auditors product processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric auditors product processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

In addition, the special operation process, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel by making the process relating to the first special symbol display device 41a and the process relating to the second special symbol display device 41b independent. It may be configured to allow simultaneous fluctuations. In this case, the processing regarding the first special symbol display device 41a and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is designated as "special figure 1 operation status". Called "1", "2", "3", "4". In addition, the processing regarding the second special symbol display 41b and the special winning device is divided into four stages, and each stage is defined as "1", "2", "3", "4" of "special diagram 2 operation status", respectively. Call. The initial setting of "special figure 1 operation status" and "special figure 2 operation status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not one of the "special figure 1 operation status" and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "special figure 1 operation status" or "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", special electric auditors product processing is performed. In the special electric auditors product processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Specifically, when the special figure 1 operation status is "4", the big hit game by the big hit of special figure 1 is executed. When the special figure 2 operation status is "4", the big hit game or the small hit game by the big hit of special figure 2 is executed. When neither “special figure 1 operation status” nor “special figure 2 operation status” is “4”, the game control microcomputer 81 indicates that “special figure 1 operation status” is “1”, “2” or “3”. It is determined. When "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", special figure 1 standby processing is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, the hit determination and the variation pattern selection of the special figure 1 are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", the special figure 1 changing process is performed. In the special figure 1 changing process, the output of the fluctuation stop command is executed after the change time of special figure 1 has elapsed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", the special figure 1 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 1 confirmation process, the opening command is output at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. After determining whether the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2" or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" or "2". It is judged whether it is "3". When "Special figure 2 operation status" is "1", special figure 2 standby processing is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, the hit determination and the variation pattern selection of the special figure 2 are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", the special figure 2 changing process is performed. In the special figure 2 changing process, the output of the fluctuation stop command is executed after the change time of special figure 2 has elapsed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 2 confirmation process, the opening command is output at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of the present embodiment, the waiting process, the changing process, and the confirming process of Toku-zu 1 and the waiting process, the changing process, and the confirming process of Toku-zu 2 are executed in parallel. R. On the other hand, the big hit game and the small hit game are executed with priority over the standby process, the variation process, and the confirmation process of special figure 1 and special figure 2.

[Special symbol waiting process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1400). When the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. Toku-zu 2 When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a small hit determination process (step S1401). In the small hitting determination processing, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the small hitting determination table T10 (FIG. 8) to perform the small hitting determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first sets the small hitting random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. It is read and it is determined whether or not it is a small hit by using the read small hit random number value and the small hit determination table T10. Next, when the result of the small hit determination is "small hit", the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and sets the special figure stop symbol data according to the small hit symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , This process ends. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special sphere 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the suspension information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b to the side where the current position is read. While shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it is reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are respectively on the left side. Shift one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been completed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 variation start process (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. In the fluctuation time timer, the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing includes information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the small hit determination processing (step S1401) and the big hit judgment processing. The information about the special figure stop symbol data set at (step S1402) and the information about the variation pattern set at the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information about variation time) are included.

In step S1401, if the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 holding ball number is "0" ( Step S1407). Toku-zu 1 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first toku-zu reservation storage area 85a, the random number group acquired due to the winning of the first starting opening 20 If not stored, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of special balls 1 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side where the random numbers are read from the current position. At the same time, the pending information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the first special figure pending storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it is reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. The reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 variation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. In the fluctuation time timer, the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination processing (step S1408) and a fluctuation pattern selection processing ( Information about the variation pattern (including information about variation time) set in step S1409) is included.

In step S1407, if the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is “0” (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is a standby screen (step). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make a determination by, for example, turning ON/OFF a customer screen for demonstration screen display for waiting. If the screen is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. When it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), the present process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol suspension is executed only when the second special symbol suspension is “0”. That is, the completion of the second special figure reservation is executed prior to the completion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special diagram suspension is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special diagram suspension (a big passing V jackpot). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the big hit determination process (step S1402) of special figure 2 and the big hit determination process (step S1408) of special figure 1 have the same processing flow, they will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed by referring to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of special figure 2, the big hit random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the toku-zu 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved piece of the first toku-zu) of the first toku-zu storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit by using the big hit determination table T1 and the big hit random number that are referred to. Here, since the high-probability state (probability variation flag is ON), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on the table for the high-probability state (the big hit determination value is “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot determination ( Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is the normal probability state (the probability variation flag is OFF), whether or not it is a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the big hit determination value is “0” to “164”) in the big hit determination table T1. Determine whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of special figure 2, the big hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of toku-zu 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first toku-zu storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the jackpot type is determined, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is “miss” (the result of the small hit determination is also “miss”), special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lose symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. This is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and this processing ends.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The flow patterns of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of FIG. 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of FIG. In the variation pattern selection processing, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is a time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is present is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1610). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small hit flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for non-time saving state small hits in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to select the fluctuation pattern. (Step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first sets the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as the table for non-time saving state small hits, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving states shown in FIG. (Address is set). “P34” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is carried out based on the special figure stop pattern data.

When the jackpot type is the V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the non-time saving state V-passing jackpot table in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a (corresponding to the first first special figure reservation) is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as the table for the non-time saving state V passage planned jackpot, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, the portion corresponding to the V passage scheduled jackpot (in FIG. "To "P3", that is, the portions where the variation patterns are "P21" and "P22" in special figure 2) are set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, and “P21” or “P22” is selected in the special figure 2.

When the jackpot type is the V non-passing jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing jackpot table in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing planned jackpot, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (in FIG. The addresses referred to are the portions of "P4" to "P6" (the portion of which the variation pattern is "P23" in special figure 2) are set). From the read variation pattern random value, one of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu 1, and “P23” is selected in Toku-zu 2.

When the small hit flag is OFF in step S1610 (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence/absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number value. Here, since the state is the non-time saving state, the reach determination based on the table for the non-time saving state (the reach presence determination value (reach success random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach success random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, when the reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) is in the non-time saving state. A variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for non-time saving state reachable loss, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, a portion corresponding to reachable loss (the variation pattern is “P7” in special FIG. 1) The portion of "P14", that is, the portion of variation patterns "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In Toku-zu 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random-number value of fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4). In Toku-zu 2, any one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random-number value of fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4). Since the fluctuation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than that when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Shorter fluctuation patterns are being selected more. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to accelerate the speed at which the special map is reserved.

When the reach random number value is not the reach success random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, when there is no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time saving state from the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the reachless loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time saving state loss without reach, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, a portion corresponding to loss without reach (the variation pattern is “P15” in special FIG. The portion of "P16", that is, the portion of variation patterns "P32" to "P33" in special figure 2) is referred to. In Toku-zu 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random-number value of fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4). In Toku-zu 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random-number value of the fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4). In this case as well, the variation pattern selected varies depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls operates.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processes of steps S1614 to S1621 are the same as the processes of steps S1604 to S1611 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 is that the portions of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621 are already described in steps S1605, S1606, and Different from S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for time saving state (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the planned V passing jackpot, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. Refers to the portion of "P41" to "P43", and the portion of the variation pattern of "P61" or "P62" in FIG. 2). From the read variation pattern random value, one of “P41” to “P43” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu 1, and “P61” or “P62” is selected in Toku-zu 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing big jackpot, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 1 refers to a portion where the variation pattern is “P44” to “P46”, and in FIG. 2 is a portion where the variation pattern is “P63”). From the read variation pattern random value, one of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu 1, and “P63” is selected in Toku-zu 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small hit, the portion corresponding to the small hit (the portion of "P74") in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 is referred to. “P74” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

After performing the variation pattern selection (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621) as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern. (Step S1630) This process ends. Information on the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of special symbols is started.

[Special symbol changing process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described above. If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this processing. Thereby, the big hit game and the small hit game are not started, the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is entered again, and the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of the jackpot that was won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, the “opening pattern 31” is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot together with the setting of the special winning opening and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting the probability variation flag and the time saving flag (returning to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the special winning opening according to the type of the selected small hit rush and big hit (step S1811). .. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this processing.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter is for counting the number of variations of special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, “10000” is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by 1 (step S2003). When the value of the probability variation counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). When "10000" is set in the probability variation counter, the value of the substantial probability variation counter never becomes "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter is for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, "10000" is set to the time saving counter when the time saving mode is entered. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1 (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). When "10000" is set in the hour/hour counter, the value of the actual hour/hour counter does not become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information about the current game state that has just been set (whether it is a probability variation state, a probability variation counter value, a time saving state, a time saving counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, while the jackpot game is being executed, the state is a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, and therefore in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric auditors product process (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “big hit end flag” is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern has all ended in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls are won in the first big winning opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period at the time of winning the predetermined number of game balls. Details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the conditions for opening the special winning opening are satisfied (step S2203). As a condition for opening the special winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not there is a ball in the special winning opening opening start opening 17. When there is no ball in the special winning opening opening start opening 17, it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied. When there is a ball in the special winning opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether it is time (timing) for opening the special winning opening. For the time to open the special winning opening, for example, when the opening time for the jackpot has passed and the opening start time in the first round game has been reached, or the big winning opening that has been temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (close time) has reached and the time to start opening again is reached. When the above conditions are not satisfied (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When the above conditions are satisfied (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) according to an opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of big hit. After the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 indicates that the opening of the special winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After the round designation command is set, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, when the special winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the special winning opening in the round game has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the special winning opening is reached. That is, any one of the above (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed after opening the special winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the conditions for closing the special winning opening are not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the special winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

In the above-mentioned step S2203, when it is not the time (timing) for opening the special winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a lapse of a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) after the special winning opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed after closing the special winning opening. When the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221) and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not been exhausted yet, this processing is ended to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball has passed the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing big jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing schedule". It is the same length as the ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to the V area 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 by "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It is possible to recognize that there is no passage of the game ball to the V area 39 by "." The ending time when there is no passage of the game ball into the V area 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the end of the big hit, the big hit end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). When the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231) and turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

Further, in the special electric auditors product processing, in addition to the opening processing of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) in the big hitting game as described above, the big winning opening in the small hitting game (first The opening process of the two major winning openings 35) is also performed. Although illustration is omitted, specifically, when the small hit flag is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 follows the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of the selected small hit rush and big hit, and then the special winning opening ( The second special winning opening 35) is opened, and then it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the special winning opening (FIG. 13) is established. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, The big prize hole is closed (closed) (small hit game end). After that, the small hit flag is turned off and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V open/close member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the values of the round counter are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

If it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first prize flag" is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the first ball winning is detected (step S2503). When the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in the round and it is not necessary to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 in a short circuit and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short circuit regardless of whether it is “short opening” or “long opening”. This is because a short release (here, 0.1 second) is sometimes executed. In the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short. Therefore, the first game ball winning the first big winning opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V valid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid is set. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 in a short circuit (here, 0.1 second) in accordance with the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) to open the V opening/closing member 71. And 1 second after closing is set to V valid period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including a period when the big hit game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid” means that the V flag is not turned on even when the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The V valid period includes a few seconds (ball brush period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed because the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a have a physical distance. This is in consideration of the period until the V area sensor 39a detects a game ball that has entered the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is set when the V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V ineffective period). It is supposed not to turn on. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see a gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned ON based on the V passage due to the illegal act, and the high probability state is prevented from being set. After the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second prize flag” is a flag that indicates that the first big winning opening 30 has won the second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). When it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, when it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). When the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time in the case of “long opening” when the second ball is won (31.5 seconds at maximum in this case). ) Is executed. In addition, since the maximum round game time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), it is generally the second prize. The time from time to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, and therefore the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. Therefore, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big winning opening 30 has the V area 39. Is configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 to the V valid period, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the special winning opening was closed. Make a decision.

When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) elapses after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, if a short circuit is opened, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after opening the V opening/closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the present process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present processing is ended while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this processing ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 advances the process to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets "10000" in the probability variation counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "10000" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the big hit game this time becomes the "high probability state", the "time saving state", and the "high base state" (that is, the highly accurate high base). This high-probability-high base state ends when the condition that either the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or the next big hit is won, is satisfied.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, it is a big jackpot before the jackpot lottery is performed 10,000 times in the highly accurate and high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot in the special symbol 2 (via the second starting opening) in the time saving state and the V jackpot scheduled to pass V (special symbol stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is the jackpot game. If V is passed inside, it is almost guaranteed that the gaming state after the big hit will be a highly accurate and high base state until the next big hit, and a small hit rush will occur.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection processing (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V area sensor 39a detects a game ball (step S2601). When the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V effective period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round. To be done. If it is not in the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends the present process. ..

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved sphere number command is a command for notifying the reserved sphere number to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number. .. After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7. Operation of Performance Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main processing from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interruption of the interruption process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. Further, the random number values may be added one by one instead of one by one. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits interruption of the interruption processing (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub timer interrupt processing is executed based on the interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. Then, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed after the sub-side timer interrupt process is completed and before the sub-side timer interrupt process is started next.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect in-progress process (step S4305). The variation production process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variation production to execute a specific display production on the display screen 7a, and the details thereof will be described later. After the process during variation effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the main display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect in which voice is output from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320) and ends this processing. In other processing, for example, random number updating processing or the like is performed.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "prefetching effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute the prefetching effect and a prefetching effect pattern to be executed. Details of the prefetch effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the prefetching effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the pending information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is likely to include a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94, based on the information about the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number included in the reserved sphere number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter that have been obtained are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter, 9B is updated. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls command is not received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned reserved display process is skipped.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol variation. Details of the variation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variation effect start processing is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variation effect ending process is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end processing" is processing for stopping the variation effect executed during special symbol variation. In the fluctuation effect ending process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect ending command for ending the fluctuation effect. As a result, the decorative design corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. When the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the fluctuation effect ending process described above is skipped.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When it is received (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command, which is set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect that is set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop design data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is applied to the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Read out from the main display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If received (step S4485: YES), a round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the special winning opening or the interval between the openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop design data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is issued in the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation command has not been received (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (a big hit game or a small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information regarding special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop design data is selected, and the ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command is not received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, when receiving the game state designation command, information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high-probability state, whether it is a time-saving state, a certain change). The values of the counter, the time saving counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V pass command, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the V passed information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on a command (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) other than the above, and ends this processing.

[Prefetching effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect determination processing (FIG. 37: step S4420). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (jackpot determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (jackpot type information), and a fluctuation included in the preliminary determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-reading effect pattern information in addition to the above-described big hit determination information, big hit type information, and variation pattern information. The prefetch effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the prefetch effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39(A), the jackpot determination information “Loss” and the variation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figure 2 reservations, respectively. The state is shown in which the result is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that the special prize 2 has been won from the state of FIG. 39(A), and the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 has been changed to the fourth special feature 2 reserved. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big hit”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, in addition, the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special figure 2 reservations and the corresponding areas corresponding to the variation are respectively referred to as “pattern A” as prefetch effect pattern information. Is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the preliminary determination information shift processing has been executed. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and The pre-determination information in the four storage areas is cleared. The prior determination information shift processing is executed in the variation effect end processing (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the prefetch effect pattern information is not stored in any of the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the readahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the advance determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the readahead effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the advance determination result included in the received advance determination command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the "reach is lost" (step S4603). Whether or not it is “big hit” or “miss with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “miss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform look-ahead production. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution judgment for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, Also, the prefetch effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the prefetch effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform it, and the prefetching effect pattern when performing the prefetching effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is “big hit” and the pre-reading effect random number value is “0 to 55”, the pre-reading effect is “none”, and when the pre-reading effect random number value is “56 to 67”, the pre-reading effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the prefetching effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the prefetching effect. In addition, when the pre-determination result is “miss with reach” and the pre-reading effect random value is “0 to 107”, the pre-reading effect is “none”, and when the pre-reading effect random value is “108 to 114”, the pre-reading effect is used. When "pattern A" is selected and the prefetching effect random number value is "115 to 127", "pattern B" is selected as the prefetching effect. The type and content of the prefetch effect pattern and the range of the selected random number value can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetching effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetching effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command in the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area prior to the corresponding storage area is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), not only is “pattern A” set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also, set "Pattern A". As a result, the pre-reading effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress status of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, the pre-reading effect is not executed when the timing of executing the pre-reading effect has already passed, but is executed at that timing before the timing of executing the pre-reading effect. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process is ended.

[Variable production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets, in the sub RAM 94, information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the variation start command, and information regarding the variation pattern. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is performed by a basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, display of a background image on the main display device 7 and its switching, display of a predetermined character and its operation, output of a melody or a sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing an additional effect such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines a basic effect pattern by referring to the basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform normal reach production, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP1 production, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP2 production, and a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP3 production, Multiple types of basic production patterns that perform SP4 production, multiple types of basic production patterns that perform SP5 production (dedicated reach production pattern for performing pseudo-big hit suggestion production described below), and multiple types of basic production that perform reach production without reach. A pattern and a plurality of types of core effect patterns that perform a small hit effect are set. The type of core effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic production pattern for performing the reachless loss production is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P74", the basic effect pattern for performing the small hit effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance up random number counter, and determines the chance up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 is a portion that determines a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns are “P21” to “P34” “P41” to “P56” “P61” to “P74”. It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and "2-NO" "2-SP1" "2-SP3" " "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and a combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed, etc. May be determined. From these, what kind of effect is to be performed as the variable effect is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command setting area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends this processing. A variation time (FIG. 42) according to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variation production process (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variation production is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of the variation effect (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the variation end command in the effect command setting area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command for the effect control microcomputer 91 to notify the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. The effect contents are switched or a specific image is displayed according to the information included in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the command before change end (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetching effect pattern information in the relevant area of the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetching effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the command before change end including the prefetching effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation-end command that does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the prefetching effect of displaying the prefetching effect image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, the pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the notice fade effect for fading the notice image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A buffer and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads a predetermined variation effect image instructed in the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Display it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the pre-variation end command is received from the sub control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the prefetch effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and when the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and then the main display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Even if the pre-change end command does not include the prefetch effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the notice fade effect for fading the notice image is displayed. Do it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the variation effect end command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5005). When it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In the other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads the predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the main display device 7. It is displayed on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image designated by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing is ended.

9. Operation of Panel Movable Body and Sub Display Device 10 Referring to FIGS. 46 to 59, the panel movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) and sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and The operation of the right sub display device 10R) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 uses the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device during the game operation (display effect), the initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like. Drive control for operating 10R is performed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect for displaying a specific image on the main display device 7 or the sub display device 10 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on.

The operation of the left sub display device 10L will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the upward movement of the left sub display device 10L. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the left sub display device 10L. The left sub display device 10L includes a rectangular display screen, and is configured to be vertically movable and horizontally rotatable. The left sub display device 10L can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first aspect). At this time, the left sub display device 10L is located in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the lower left. When the left sub display device 10L moves (advances) upward from the retracted position of FIG. 1 to the relay position shown in FIG. 46, it rotates rightward from that position as shown in FIG. It is possible to move to the advance position (deployment position) shown and then stop there (second mode). In the second mode, the left sub display device 10L stops on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The left sub display device 10L is configured to change the orientation of the display screen by 90 degrees between the retracted position of FIG. 1 and the advanced position of FIG. The left sub-display device 10L can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) from the advanced position of FIG. 48 through the states of FIGS. You can

The operation of the right sub display device 10R will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the upward movement of the right sub display device 10R. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the left rotation of the right sub display device 10R. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the right sub display device 10R. Like the left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R includes a rectangular display screen and moves vertically and horizontally so that the movement mode (movement locus) is line-symmetrical to the left sub display device 10L. Is configured to be possible. The right sub display device 10R can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the right sub display device 10R is located at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the lower right display. When the right sub display device 10R moves (advances) upward from the retracted position of FIG. 1 and moves to the relay position (relay position) shown in FIG. 49, it rotates counterclockwise from that position as shown in FIG. , It is possible to move to the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 51 and stop there (second mode). In the second mode, the right sub display device 10R stops on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the advance position of the right sub display device 10R and the advance position of the left sub display device 10L are the same position. However, these advance positions may be different. For example, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R may be adjacent to each other near the center of the display screen 7a when they are in the advanced position. The right sub display device 10R is configured to change the orientation of the display screen by 90 degrees between the retracted position of FIG. 1 and the advanced position of FIG. The right sub display device 10R can move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 51 to the state shown in FIGS. You can

As shown in FIG. 52, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R can move upward (relay position) in parallel. Also, the vehicle can be stopped at this relay position.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the movement (advance movement) of the first movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction. FIG. 54 is an explanatory view illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the rotation operation of the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. 53, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and are attached with half of the decorative portion (the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion) with a smile face drawn on the tip side. ing. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is at a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are partially visible. In the first movable accessory 14, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R move from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other), as shown in FIG. By doing so, at the advanced position (expanded position) shown in FIG. 54, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are united to form one decorative member (rotating body) (second mode). In the second aspect, the rotating body in which the left side decoration portion and the right side decoration portion are united stops on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, this rotating body can rotate rightward and leftward (rightward in the figure) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at any inclined angle. The first movable accessory 14 can move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 to pass through the state shown in FIG. 53, and then stands there. be able to.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 is an explanatory view exemplifying the second mode of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotation operation of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as “OARO”, and is configured to be vertically movable and horizontally rotatable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stationary at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 56 (second mode). .. In the second aspect, the decoration section stops on the front surface of the main display device 7 so as to cover a portion slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 57, this decorative portion can rotate right and left (in the drawing, right) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at any inclined angle. The second movable accessory 15 can move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) upward from the advance position of FIGS. 56 and 57, and can stand there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a first combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a second combination effect by the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 58, the first movable auditors product 14 and the second movable auditors product 15 are both in the second mode, so that the first combination effect can be executed. That is, when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 both move to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary in a state where they are partially overlapped and combined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are the first movable accessory 15 and the first movable accessory 15 in a state where the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the upper side of the first movable accessory 14. The second combination effect in which the movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are inclined at the same angle can be performed. In the second combination effect, after the first combination effect, two movable accessory objects are formed by being rotated (tilted) together, and when the two movable accessory objects are tilted and move to the advance position and overlap each other, There is a case where the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the first combination effect.

10. Example of effect, example of effect, modified example, example of aspect of the present embodiment Hereinafter, each example of the effect of the present embodiment (display effect example, accessory moving effect example) will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modified example, and an aspect example for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, variation pattern information, pre-determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

The sub-display device interlocking effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. This sub-display device interlocking effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative symbol (for example, during the pseudo effect effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub display device interlocking effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image data is read. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub display device interlocking effect, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are included. ) Position and tilt.

[Sub display device linked production A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device linked effect A. In the sub display device interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). .. The specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 is a smile face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 60(B) to 60(C), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in the lower left direction, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed. To move to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of a portion of the main display device 7 which is covered by the sub display device 10. R. Then, as shown in FIG. 60C, the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60D, the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R, and is newly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 is displayed. The specific image TG2 is an image showing the appearance of a specific target, and here, like the specific image TG1, is a smile face image. The specific image TG2 is an image larger than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in the area above the right sub display device 10R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 may be the specific image TG1 that is moved while being enlarged while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L and right sub display device 10R) moves from the retracted position (home position) to the upper relay position (relay position), Stop (stop) at the relay position. Part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is covered by the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) at the relay position. In other words, the sub display device 10 stands still (stops) at a position that covers a part of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). In other words, the sub display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 which is covered by the sub display device 10. That is, in the state where the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a reduction effect of reducing the specific image TG2 is executed. Here, the specific image TG2 is reduced while moving across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 while maintaining the display, and moves downward, so that the entire specific image TG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) moves from the relay position (relay position) to the lower retracted position (home position), It stops (stops) at the retracted position. At this time, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the specific image TG2 moves upward in the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) when the sub display device 10 moves downward. Thereafter, the specific image TG2 is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7 at a portion protruding from above the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). That is, in the state where the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 60(G) to 60(I), the specific image TG2 does not substantially change its relative position with respect to the main display device 7, and the whole of the sub-display device 10 (right sub-display device) is displayed. 10R), the entire display is switched to the state displayed on the main display device 7. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(J), with the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7, the specific image TG3 is newly displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). The specific image TG3 is an image showing the appearance of a specific target, and here, like the specific image TG1, is a smile face image.

[Sub display device interlocking production B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device linked effect B. 61A to 61C of the sub display device interlocking effect B are similar to FIGS. 60A to 60C of the sub display device interlocking effect A. That is, in the sub display device interlocking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). ing. The specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG1 represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 is a smile face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61(B) to 61(C), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 moves in the lower left direction, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed. To move to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the specific image TG1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of a portion of the main display device 7 which is covered by the sub display device 10. R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61C, the entire specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R and is newly displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 is displayed. The specific image TG2 is an image showing the appearance of a specific target, and here, like the specific image TG1, is a smile face image. The specific image TG2 is an image larger than the specific image TG1. Here, the specific image TG2 is displayed in a region near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG2 may be the specific image TG1 that is moved while being enlarged while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61E to 61F, the right sub display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position). It moves to the advance position (expand position) and stops there (stops). Part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is covered when the right sub display device 10R is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) stands still (stops) at a position covering a part of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the specific image TG2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). In other words, the sub display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the part of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7 which is covered by the sub display device 10. That is, in the state where the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(G), a reduction effect of reducing the specific image TG2 is executed. Here, the specific image TG2 is reduced while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 while maintaining the display, and the entire specific image TG2 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the right sub display device 10R moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retracted position (home position) by right rotation and downward movement, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the specific image TG2 moves toward the left side of the right sub display device 10R when the right sub display device 10R is rotating to the right. After that, the specific image TG2 is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7 at a portion protruding from the left side of the right sub display device 10R. That is, in the state where the specific image TG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, the portion displayed on the main display device 7 gradually increases. As a result, the entire specific image TG2 is displayed on the right sub display device 10R, as shown in FIGS. 61(G) to 61(I), with its relative position to the main display device 7 almost unchanged. The state is switched to the state in which the whole is displayed on the main display device 7. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(J), with the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7, the specific image TG3 is newly displayed on the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). The specific image TG3 is an image showing the appearance of a specific target, and here, like the specific image TG1, is a smile face image.

[Sub display device interlocking effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect C. In the sub display device interlocking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative design forms a reach, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (here, temporarily stopped with "5"), and the middle decorative design. 8C is variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(B) to 62(C), the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative design 8Z1 is an image of a design (number) that becomes a big hit when stopped as a middle decorative design in the reach effect, and is the same design (number) as the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. Here, it is "5". This decorative pattern 8Z1 also corresponds to a specific image because it represents a number as a specific target. The decorative pattern 8Z1 moves in the lower left direction and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the decorative pattern 8Z1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of a portion of the main display device 7 which is covered by the sub display device 10. R. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the entire decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62D, the decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears from the right sub display device 10R and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. .. The decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is larger than when it was displayed on the right sub display device 10R. Here, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed in a region near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative pattern 8Z1 may be moved while being enlarged while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(E) to 62(F), the left sub display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates right at the relay position (relay position), It moves to the advance position (expand position) and stops there (stops). The decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub display device 10L is moved to the advanced position. In other words, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) stands still (stops) at a position covering a part of the main display device 7 where the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative pattern 8Z1 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). In other words, the sub display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the main display device 7 which is covered by the sub display device 10. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is gradually displayed in the sub display device 10 while being displayed in the state where it is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), reduction effect in which the decorative symbol 8Z1 is reduced is executed. Here, the decorative design 8Z1 is reduced while maintaining the display across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the entire decorative design 8Z1 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). At this time, the effect image EF which is a light emission image is displayed around the decorative pattern 8Z1. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF suggests that "5" of the decorative pattern 8Z1 is determined as the medium decorative pattern 8C. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the left sub display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z1 moves toward the right side in the left sub display device 10L when the left sub display device 10L rotates left. After that, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7 at a portion protruding from the right side of the left sub display device 10L. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is gradually displayed in the main display device 7 while being displayed in the state where it is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. As a result, the decorative pattern 8Z1 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L as a whole, as shown in FIGS. 62(G) to 62(I), while keeping the relative position to the main display device 7 almost unchanged. The state is switched to the state in which the whole is displayed on the main display device 7. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(J), in the state where "5, 5, 5" is fixedly displayed (stopped display) as the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the main display device 7. The left decorative design 8ZL, the middle decorative design 8ZC, and the right decorative design 8ZR are fixedly displayed (stopped) on the sub display device 10 (the right sub display device 10R and the left sub display device 10L). The decorative design 8ZL, the middle decorative design 8ZC, and the right decorative design 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are confirmed and displayed almost at the same time. R.

[Sub display device linked production D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the sub-display device interlocking effect D. In the sub display device interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative design forms a reach, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (here, temporarily stopped with "5"), and the middle decorative design. 8C is variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed across both the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. The decorative design 8Z1 is an image of a design (number) that becomes a big hit when stopped as a middle decorative design in the reach effect, and is the same design (number) as the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R. Here, it is "5". This decorative pattern 8Z1 also corresponds to a specific image because it represents a number as a specific target. The plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed side by side in a ring shape, and each is moving along a ring-shaped orbit. Here it is moving clockwise. A part of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a ring is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The decorative pattern 8Z1 located at the lower right moves in the lower left direction, and moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 63(B), the decorative symbol 8Z1 is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Here, the sub display device 10 covers a part of the main display device 7, and the sub display device 10 displays an image of a portion of the main display device 7 which is covered by the sub display device 10. R. Similarly, the decorative pattern 8Z1 located below moves to the left and moves from the display screen of the right sub display device 10R to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The decorative pattern 8Z1 located at the lower left moves to the upper left, and moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Thereafter, the display of the plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 disappears, and as shown in FIG. 63(C), the entire decorative pattern 8Z2 is newly displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the decorative pattern 8Z1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is enlarged and displayed while maintaining the display. Note that the decorative pattern 8Z2 may disappear once and then the enlarged decorative pattern 8Z2 may be displayed again. Further, the decorative design 8Z2 may be one in which one of the plurality of decorative designs 8Z1 is moved.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(E) to 63(F), the left sub display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates right at the relay position (relay position), It moves to the advance position (expand position) and stops there (stops). The decorative pattern 8Z2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the left sub display device 10L moves to the advanced position. In other words, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) stops (stops) at a position that covers a part of the main display device 7 where the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the decorative pattern 8Z2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). In other words, the sub display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the decorative pattern 8Z2 displayed on the main display device 7 which is covered by the sub display device 10. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 10 while being displayed in a state where the decoration pattern 8Z2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), reduction effect for reducing the decorative design 8Z2 is executed. Here, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is reduced while maintaining the display across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and the entire decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L). At this time, the effect image EF, which is a light emitting image, is displayed around the decorative pattern 8Z2. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF suggests that “5” of the decorative pattern 8Z2 has been determined as the medium decorative pattern 8C. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot has been confirmed. Further, on the main display device 7, a plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 are displayed side by side in a ring shape. Each of the plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 is moving along a circular orbit. Here it is moving clockwise. A part of the plurality of decorative symbols 8Z1 arranged in a ring is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the other part is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The plurality of decorative patterns 8Z1 are displayed so as to surround the decorative pattern 8Z2 displayed on the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), the left sub display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and stands still (stops) at the retracted position. .. At this time, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 so that the relative position with respect to the main display device 7 does not change. That is, the decorative pattern 8Z2 moves toward the right side in the left sub display device 10L when the left sub display device 10L is rotating counterclockwise. After that, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is sequentially displayed on the main display device 7 at a portion protruding from the right side of the left sub display device 10L. In other words, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is gradually displayed in the main display device 7 while being displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. As a result, the decorative pattern 8Z2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L as a whole, as shown in FIGS. 63(G) to 63(I), with its relative position to the main display device 7 almost unchanged. The state is switched to the state in which the whole is displayed on the main display device 7. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(J), in the state where "5, 5, 5" is fixedly displayed (stopped display) as the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the main display device 7. The left decorative design 8ZL, the middle decorative design 8ZC, and the right decorative design 8ZR are fixedly displayed (stopped display) on the sub display device 10 (the right sub display device 10R and the left sub display device 10L). The decorative design 8ZL, the middle decorative design 8ZC, and the right decorative design 8ZR are images corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R displayed on the main display device 7, and are confirmed and displayed almost at the same time. R.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the sub-display device interlocking effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 60D to FIG. 60E, a first effect in which the specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7, and a first effect. After that, the sub display device 10 moves from the first position and stops (stops) at a second position that covers a part of the main display device 7 where the specific image TG2 is displayed. It is possible to execute the second effect of displaying on the sub display device 10 an image corresponding to the portion covered by the sub display device 10 of the specific image TG2 displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61D to 61F, 62D to 62F, and 63D to 63F.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60E to 60G, after the second effect, the specification displayed across the sub display device 10 and the main display device 7 is performed. It is possible to execute the third effect in which the image TG2 is reduced and displayed, and the fourth effect in which the entire reduced specific image TG2 is displayed on the sub display device 10 after the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61(F) to 61(G), FIGS. 62(F) to 62(G), and FIGS. 63(F) to 63(G).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60G to 60I, the sub display device 10 moves from the second position to the first position after the fourth effect. At the same time, it is possible to execute the fifth effect in which the entire reduced specific image TG2 is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61(G) to 61(I), 62(G) to 62(I), and 63(G) to 63(I).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60B to 60C, when the sub display device 10 is stopped at the first position before the first effect, The sixth effect in which the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display device 10 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 61B to 61C, 62B to 62C, and 63B.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61(D) to 61(F),
The direction of the sub display device 10 is different when the sub display device 10 is stopped at the first position and when it is stopped at the second position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 62(D) to 62(F) and FIGS. 63(D) to 63(F).
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the specific image is a decorative pattern, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the hold icon linked effect.
[Modification 1]
In the sub display device interlocking effect A of FIG. 60, both the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R of the sub display device 10 are assumed to move upward. However, a configuration may be adopted in which only the right sub display device 10R moves upward and the left sub display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 2]
In the sub display device interlocking effect B of FIG. 61, the right sub display device 10R is assumed to move. However, the left sub display device 10L may be configured to move. In the sub display device interlocking effect C of FIG. 62 and the sub display device interlocking effect D of FIG. 63, the left sub display device 10L is assumed to move. However, the configuration may be such that the right sub display device 10R moves.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the sub-display device interlocking effects A to D in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the sub-display device interlocking effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative patterns of FIGS. 62 and 63 may be adopted as the specific image.

[Modification 5]
The sub-display device interlocking effects of FIGS. 60 to 63 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added. For example, the sub-display device interlocking effect of FIGS. 60 to 61 may be executed while the decorative design is changing, and the variable display of the decorative design may be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising: a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
The first display means is configured to be movable,
A first effect in which a specific image representing a specific target is displayed on the second display means;
After the first effect, the first display unit moves from the first position to cover a part of the second display unit where the specific image is displayed. A first image display unit that stops at the position and displays on the first display unit an image corresponding to a portion of the specific image displayed on the second display unit that is covered by the first display unit. 2 effects and can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the specific image displayed across the first display unit and the second display unit is reduced and displayed,
After the third effect, a fourth effect in which the entire reduced specific image is displayed on the first display means can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
After the fourth effect, the first display unit moves from the second position to the first position, and the entire reduced specific image is displayed on the second display unit. It is possible to execute the fifth effect
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
Before the first effect, a sixth effect in which the specific image is displayed on the first display unit can be executed when the first display unit is stopped at the first position. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
The first display means has a different orientation when the first display means is stopped at the first position and when the first display means is stopped at the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
The specific image is a decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol variation stop effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. This decorative symbol variation stop effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol variation stop effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. The effect is to display an image on the screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18, and the like. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative pattern variation stop effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect A. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is subjected to reach display in which it changes at high speed. This reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character makes various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64C, the lost display effect 1 is performed. In this lost display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed as 6 symbols in the reach display, and the lost symbol is displayed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped by doublet, it becomes a big hit symbol, and when stopped and displayed by other than doublet, it becomes a lost symbol. This lost pattern is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the lost display effect 2 is performed. In the lost display effect 2, the lost design is moved and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the lost symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. The lost design ZA1 is “7 6 7” like the lost design shown by the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Decorative pattern fluctuation stop production B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect B. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is subjected to reach display in which it changes at high speed. This reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character makes various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), a left sub display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub display device movement effect, the left sub display device 10L moves from the home position to the unfolded position, moves to substantially the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is the left sub display device. It is an effect displayed on the display device 10L. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L is moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the lost display effect 1 is performed. In this lost display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed as 6 symbols in the reach display, and the lost symbol is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped by doublet, it becomes a big hit symbol, and when stopped and displayed by other than doublet, it becomes a lost symbol. This lost design is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), the lost display effect 2 is performed. In the lost display effect 2, the left sub display device 10L returns from the expanded position to the home position, and the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the decorative pattern 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all the lost symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lost symbol ZA1 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. The lost design ZA1 is “7 6 7” like the lost design shown by the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Decorative pattern variation stop effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect C. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is subjected to reach display in which it changes at high speed. This reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this reach effect, a predetermined character makes various effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), a left sub display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub display device movement effect, the left sub display device 10L moves from the home position to the unfolded position, moves to substantially the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern 8C displayed on the display screen 7a is the left sub display device. It is an effect displayed on the display device 10L. At this time, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L is moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), the jackpot display effect 1 is performed. In this jackpot display effect 1, the decoration symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at 7 symbols in the reach display, and the jackpot symbol is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped by doublet, it becomes a big hit symbol, and when stopped and displayed by other than doublet, it becomes a lost symbol. The jackpot pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the jackpot display effect 2 is performed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the left sub display device 10L returns from the expanded position to the home position, and the decorative design 8C displayed on the decorative design 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all of the jackpot symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. The jackpot pattern ZA2 is "7 7 7" as is the case with the jackpot pattern shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Decorative pattern variation stop effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation stop effect D. In the decorative symbol variation stop effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and a plurality of other decorative symbols are also displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the diagram), and the decorative symbol 8C is changed at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this case, the decorative symbols representing the 7 symbols are arranged in a circle and moved counterclockwise. As shown in the figure, a reach display is formed on a plurality of reach lines LN by a plurality of decorative symbols showing 7 symbols. The reach display is displayed across the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. In this reach effect, a predetermined character makes various effects. In addition, the reach line LN is a line for performing a reach display by temporarily stopping the decorative design, and when a big hit occurs, the big hit design is arranged on the reach line LN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), a left sub display device movement effect is performed. In this left sub-display device movement effect, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the home position to the expanded position and moves to the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the decorative pattern in high speed change displayed on the display screen 7a. 8C is an effect displayed on the left sub display device 10L. At this time, the plurality of decorative symbols showing the 7 symbols including the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are moving counterclockwise. Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L is moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), the jackpot display effect 1 is performed. In this jackpot display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in 7 symbols in the reach display, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the plurality of reach lines LN. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the left sub display device 10L. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped by doublet, it becomes a big hit symbol, and when stopped and displayed by other than doublet, it becomes a lost symbol. The jackpot pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the jackpot display effect 2 is performed. In this jackpot display effect 2, the left sub display device 10L returns from the expanded position to the home position, and the decorative design 8C displayed on the decorative design 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, all of the jackpot patterns formed on the plurality of reach lines LN are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. The jackpot pattern ZA2 is "7 7 7" as is the case with the jackpot pattern shown by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
The decorative symbol variation stop effect is performed in the same variation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed for a plurality of fluctuations.

[Modification]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, after the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol ZA2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. In this case, after the lost symbol or the jackpot symbol is displayed on the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R, the lost symbol ZA1 or the symbol ZA2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a.
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, after the left sub display device 10L has moved to the front of the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L display the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol. In this case, the display screen 7a may move and move toward the left sub display device 10L, and the lost design ZA1 or the jackpot design may be displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L. Further, both the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L may move so that the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L display the lost symbol ZA1 or the jackpot symbol.
In the decorative pattern variation stop effects C and D, at the time of the left sub display device movement effect, a button image representing the effect button 63 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L (for example, on the decorative pattern 8C), and the player is shown. The effect button 63 may be urged to be pressed, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the jackpot symbol may be displayed. Further, the effect button may be displayed on the jackpot pattern, and by pressing the effect button 63, a predetermined effect (for example, re-lottery effect for changing the jackpot pattern) may be performed.
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation stop effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R may be moved when a lost symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed during the reach effect. For example, the moving decorative pattern may be rotated around the decorative pattern 8C. In this case, when the moving decorative design overlaps with the lost design ZA1 or the big hit design ZA2, the moving decorative design may pass behind the lost design ZA1 or the big hit design ZA2.
Further, in the decorative symbol variation stop effect D, in the reach effect, when displaying a lost symbol or a jackpot symbol, the decorative symbols on a plurality of reach lines LN may be moved. For example, the moving decorative pattern may be rotated around the decorative pattern 8C. In this case, when the moving decorative pattern overlaps with the jackpot pattern ZA2, it may be passed behind the jackpot pattern ZA2.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative pattern fluctuation stop effect.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, after the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R) are either lost symbols or jackpot symbols (predetermined stop of the decorative symbol). Aspect) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect of the decorative pattern by using the two display devices, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, the same variation is performed. According to this configuration, the effect that the decorative design is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a and the left sub-display device 10L (right sub-display device 10R) have a lost design or a jackpot design (a predetermined stop mode of the decorative design). ) Can be experienced as a series of effects, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effects C and D, after the jackpot pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a, the jackpot pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect of the jackpot pattern by using the two display devices, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effects B to D, at least a part of the symbols forming the jackpot symbol displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L is moved and displayed when the jackpot symbol is formed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect of the jackpot pattern by using the two display devices, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative symbol variation stop effect, the same decorative symbol (7 symbol) displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L is displayed before the jackpot symbol and the lost symbol are stopped and displayed (for example, during reach effect). Moved and displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect of the jackpot pattern by using the two display devices, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZA-1]
A gaming machine comprising a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means are each capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative design on the first display means,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decorative pattern in a predetermined stop mode on the first display means and the second display means,
There are cases where a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect is performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZA-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect ZA-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect in the same change.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZA-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect ZA-1 or Aspect ZA-2,
The predetermined stop mode of the decorative symbol in the second display effect is a mode that represents a jackpot symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZA-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZA-3,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect in which, in the first display means and the second display means, the same symbol as the symbol forming the jackpot symbol in the second display factor is moved and displayed.
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZA-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZA-1 to ZA-4,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the same decorative pattern is moved and displayed in the first display means and the second display means,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed, the first display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the second display effect is performed after the first display effect. Is
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
○ When the first jackpot pattern is displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the second jackpot pattern is displayed on either the first display means or the second display means. R.
After either the first display means or the second display means moves (in front of the other display means), the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first display means and the second display means.
Further, when the moved display means returns to the home position, the second jackpot symbol is displayed.
A plurality of jackpot lines are formed with the first display means or the second display means, and jackpot symbols are displayed on each of them.
After displaying the button image on either the first display means or the second display means, the jackpot pattern is displayed on the first display means and the second display means by pushing the button.
A plurality of decorative symbols move between the first display means and the second display means. At this time, the plurality of decorative symbols move behind the second jackpot pattern.
A button image representing the effect button 63 is displayed on the decorative pattern 8C.

The special variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. This special variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the special variation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is read. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. In the special variation effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Special variation A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, the message image "Hot zone entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is an effect that is performed during a predetermined period during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advance position, as indicated by an arrow YG2. At this time, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L ends the movement and stops at the advance position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the display screen of the left sub display device 10L shows that the intermediate effect symbol 8C, "3", is changing downward as shown by the arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect that the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, it is shown that the intermediate effect symbol 8C, "5", is stopped.

[Special variation production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, the message image "Hot zone entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is an effect that is performed during a predetermined period during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advance position, as indicated by an arrow YG2. At this time, of the images displayed on the display screen 7a, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the movement completion effect is executed. This movement completion effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L ends the movement and stops at the advance position.
Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the medium effect symbol 8C is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared with the effect symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, it is shown that "3", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, is changing downward as shown by an arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect that the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, in particular, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the medium effect symbol 8C is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared with the effect symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, it is shown that the intermediate effect symbol 8C, "5", is stopped.

[Special variation effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a zone entry effect is executed. In the zone entry effect, the message image "Hot zone entry" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hot zone is an effect that is performed during a predetermined period during the fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70D to 70H, the middle symbol variation effect is executed. This middle symbol variation effect is a variation display on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advance position, the middle effect symbol 8C which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R displayed on the display device 7a. It is a production to do.

First, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the medium effect symbol 8C, “3”, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), the middle effect symbol 8C, “3”, moves downward as indicated by the arrow YG2, and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the left sub display device 10L. Is displayed across the display screen of. Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), the medium effect symbol 8C, “3”, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L while moving downward as indicated by the arrow YG3. Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), "3", which is the medium effect symbol 8C, moves downward as shown by an arrow YG4, while the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the main display device 7 are displayed. It is displayed across the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(H), the medium effect symbol 8C, “3”, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display screen 7 while moving downward as indicated by YG5.

[Special variation production D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the special variation effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 71(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIGS. 71C and 71D, the middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, on the display screen 7a, it is shown that the medium effect symbol 8C, "3", is changing downward as shown by the arrow YG1. Further, as shown in FIG. 71(D), “3”, which is the medium effect design 8C, moves downward as shown by an arrow YG2. At this time, the left sub display device 10L is in the retracted position, and the intermediate effect design 8C is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, the fixed stop effect (loss) of FIG. 71(E) is executed. This fixed stop effect (loose) is an effect for stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which both the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are "5" and the middle effect design 8C is "4".

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of special variation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C among the variable displays of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is possible to carry out (FIG. 68(G), FIG. 69(G), and FIG. 70(D)-(H)). With this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect design 8C, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L is moved so as to overlap the middle effect design 8C that is variably displayed on the display screen 7a (FIG. 68(D)(E)(F), FIG. 69(D). )(E)(F)), the variable display of the middle effect design 8C is performed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 68(G), FIG. 69(G), and FIG. 70(D) to (H)). ). With this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect design 8C, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, one row of the production symbols 8L among the three rows of the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. With this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the specific one row of effect symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the medium symbol variation effect, the medium effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and straddles the display screen 7a and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. And is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. After being displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the medium effect design 8C is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect design 8C, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, triggered by the execution of the zone entry effect (FIG. 68(C), FIG. 69(C), FIG. 70(C)), the variable display of the intermediate effect design 8C is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. On the display screen of. According to this configuration, the zone effect can be widened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C displayed on the left sub display device 10L can be displayed larger than the effect symbols 8L and 8R of the display device 7a (FIG. 69(G)(H). )). According to this configuration, it is possible to further give a special feeling to the variable display of the medium effect design 8C, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
A modified example of the special variation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the production was performed using the left sub display device 10L, but in addition to or in place of the left sub display device 10L, the production of displaying the middle production design 8C may be performed using the right sub display device 10R. ..
[Modification 2]
In the above, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one row of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, but two or more rows of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. It may be displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.
[Modification 3]
In the above description, when the zone entry effect is executed (FIG. 68(C), FIG. 69(C), FIG. 70(C)), the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is performed using the left sub display device 10L. However, when the zone entry effect is executed, the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C using the left sub display device 10L and the variable display of the intermediate effect symbol 8C using the left sub display device 10L are performed. It may be branched to the case where there is not (FIG. 71).

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
A first display device capable of performing variable display of effect symbols,
A game machine having a second display device different from the first display device,
Among the variable display of the effect symbols performed on the display screen of the first display device, the variable display of the effect symbols in a predetermined column can be performed on the display screen of the second display device. Amusement machine.

[Aspect A3-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
The game machine characterized in that the second display device is moved so as to overlap the effect symbol of the predetermined column of the first display device, and performs variable display of the effect symbol of the predetermined example.

[Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or A3-2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined row of effect symbols is any one row of effect symbols of a plurality of rows of effect symbols.

[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
During the variation, the effect symbols in the predetermined row are displayed on one of the display screens of the first display device and the second display device, and then cross the display screens of the first display device and the second display device. The game machine is characterized by being displayed on the other display screen.

[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
A game machine characterized by performing a variable display of the effect symbols in the predetermined column on the display screen of the second display device when a specific effect is executed.

[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
The effect design displayed on the display screen of the second display device is larger than the effect design displayed on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect A3-7]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-5,
Even when the specific effect is executed, the variable display of the effect symbol in the predetermined column may not be performed on the display screen of the second display device.

Character display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. This character display effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the character display effect 1 is performed. In this character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a teammate character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a character display effect 2 is performed. In this character display effect 2, after the character CRA is displayed on the left sub display device 10L, it is moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a character display effect 3 is performed. The character display effect 3 is an effect in which the character CRA is returned to and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a again.
After this, reach production is performed.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), character display effect 1 is performed. In this character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a teammate character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), character display effect 2 is performed. In the character display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the development position near the center of the display screen 7a (where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. Is an effect displayed on the left sub display device 10L. The hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), character display effect 3 is performed. In this character display effect 3, the left sub display device 10L moves from the expanded position to the home position, and the character CRA is again displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.
After this, reach production is performed.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect C.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), character display effect 1 is performed. In this character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a teammate character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), character display effect 2 is performed. In the character display effect 2, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the development position near the center of the display screen 7a (where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. Further, in the character display effect 2, the character focus image ZB1 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This character focus image ZB1 is an image displayed on a portion other than the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L to emphasize the character CRA, and represents, for example, a plurality of speed lines from the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L. Or an image representing a predetermined emblem or the like. The character focus image ZB1 may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 in a portion of the left sub display device 10L excluding the character CRA. Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L is moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), character display effect 3 is performed. In this character display effect 3, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the unfolded position to the home position, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a, and the character focus image ZB1 of the illumination panel 18 is erased. Is transparent. The hold icon 9A is displayed again on the left sub display device 10L.
After this, reach production is performed.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect D.
In the character display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), character display effect 1 is performed. In this character display effect 1, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This character CRA represents a teammate character.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75C and 75D, a character display effect 2 and a character display effect 3 are performed. That is, in the character display effects 2 and 3, the left sub-display device 10L is driven toward the expanded position (near the center of the display screen 7a on which the character CRA is displayed) and reaches the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. When it comes, the image corresponding to the hidden part of the character CRA is gradually displayed on the left sub display device 10L while hiding the character CRA on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), character display effect 4 is performed. In this character display effect 4, the left sub-display device 10L moves to the development position near the center of the display screen 7a (where the character CRA is displayed in the character display effect 1), and the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. Further, in the character display effect 2, the character focus image ZB1 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This character focus image ZB1 is an image displayed on a portion other than the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L to emphasize the character CRA, and represents, for example, a plurality of speed lines from the portion corresponding to the left sub display device 10L. Or an image representing a predetermined emblem or the like. The character focus image ZB1 may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 in a portion of the left sub display device 10L excluding the character CRA. Further, the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L is moved to the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), character display effect 5 is performed. In this character display effect 5, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the expanded position to the home position, the character CRA is displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a, and the character focus image ZB1 of the illumination panel 18 is erased and its part is deleted. Is transparent. The hold icon 9A is displayed again on the left sub display device 10L.
After this, reach production is performed.

[Modification]
In the character display effects C and D, when the left sub display device 10L moves to the position of the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L sequentially starts from the area on the front side of the character CRA. The character CRA is displayed. On the other hand, when the left sub display device 10L hides all the characters CRA displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA may be displayed on the left sub display device 10L.

The character display effect is performed with the same variation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed with different variations.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of character display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the character display effect, after the character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the character CRA is displayed on the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the display effect of the character by using the two display devices, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the character display effect, the character CRA is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the left sub display device 10L is in the front position near the center of the display screen 7a. The character CRA is displayed at a position corresponding to the displayed character CRA. According to this configuration, since the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if moved to the left sub display device 10L located in front of the display screen 7a, it is possible to provide a stereoscopic display effect. Is possible. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the character display effect, the left sub display device 10L moves from the home position to the expanded position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the left sub display device 10L is in the expanded position. The character CRA is displayed at a position corresponding to the character CRA displayed on 7a. According to this configuration, since the left sub display device 10L moves, the character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed as if it moved to the left sub display device 10L located in front of the display screen 7a. It is possible to produce a display effect with a dynamic and three-dimensional effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the character display effect, when the left sub display device 10L moves to the expanded position, the left sub display device 10L rotationally moves (moves to the right) about a predetermined axis (see FIG. 47). With this configuration, it is possible to perform a display effect with a more dynamic and three-dimensional effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the character display effects C and D, the character CRA is displayed by moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub display device 10L, and in that case, a portion of the illumination panel 18 corresponding to the left sub display device 10L (left sub display device). A character focus image ZB1 that is an image different from the character CRA is displayed in a portion different from the portion corresponding to the character CRA displayed on 10L). According to this configuration, the presence of the character CRA can be increased, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a more dynamic and three-dimensional effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZB-1]
A gaming machine comprising a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means can respectively execute a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the first display means,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the predetermined image on the second display means,
There are cases where a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect is performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZB-1,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the predetermined image is displayed at a first position of the first display means, and in the second display effect, the second display means is changed to the second position. A third position corresponding to the first position of the first display unit in the second display unit in the second position which is a position before the first position of the first display unit. Display the predetermined image at a position,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZB-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the second display unit is moved from the state in the fourth position to the second position, and the second display unit is moved to the second position. In a certain state, the predetermined image is displayed at the third position on the second display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZB-3,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, when the second display means moves to the second position, the second display means rotates about a predetermined axis.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZB-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect ZB-3 or Aspect ZB-4,
A third display means different from the first display means and the second display means,
The third display means is arranged in front of the first display means and the second display means,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
In the third display effect, when the predetermined image is displayed at the third position of the second display means in the second display effect, the second display effect is generated in the third display means. An image different from the predetermined image is displayed in a portion different from the portion corresponding to the predetermined image displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
When the second display means moves to the position of the predetermined image on the first display means, the predetermined images are sequentially displayed from the area in front of the predetermined image.
The predetermined images are sequentially displayed on the second display means, and finally all the predetermined images are displayed.

The selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. This selection effect can be executed during a variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the selected effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device 7 is read. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of No. 1 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the selected effect, the position of the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R). And change the inclination.

[Selection A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect A. In the selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, the decorative design forms a reach, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (here, temporarily stopped with "5"), and the middle decorative design. 8C is variably displayed. Here, a selection effect of selecting one symbol from among a plurality of symbol (number) candidates finally selected as the medium decoration symbol 8C is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, 1 out of three types of symbols “3”, “4”, and “5”. An example of an effect in which one symbol is selected is shown. The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that indicates that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect that selects one image from a plurality of types of images. 76(A) to 76(F) of this embodiment suggest that the selection effect in which one symbol is selected from the three types of symbols “3” “4” “5” is started. And corresponds to the selection effect start effect. And FIG.76(H) alert|reports that the design "4" was selected from three types of design "3""4""5", and corresponds to a selection determination effect. 76(I) to 76(J) inform that the symbol "5" has been selected from the three types of symbols "3", "4" and "5", and this is also a selection decision effect. Applicable

In FIG. 76(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the first middle decoration symbol 8C1 representing "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed at the position where the middle decoration symbol is displayed. Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(B) to 76(C), the second middle decorative pattern 8C2 representing "4" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the first middle decorative pattern 8C1. Will be displayed as a temporary stop. The second middle decorative pattern 8C2 displayed here is larger than the first middle decorative pattern 8C1, and the second middle decorative pattern 8C2 overlaps in front of the first middle decorative pattern 8C1, so that the first middle decorative pattern 8C1 It becomes difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(D) to 76(E), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 representing “5” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the second middle decorative pattern 8C2. Overlap with. The third middle decorative pattern 8C1 displayed here is larger than the first middle decorative pattern 8C1, and the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 overlaps in front of the second middle decorative pattern 8C2, whereby the second middle decorative pattern 8C2 is obtained. It becomes difficult to see. After that, the first middle decoration pattern 8C1 representing “3” larger than the third middle decoration pattern 8C3 moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the third middle decoration pattern 8C3. Next, the second middle decoration pattern 8C2, which is larger than the first middle decoration pattern 8C1, moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the first middle decoration pattern 8C1. In this way, the effect of covering the middle decoration pattern in which the larger middle decoration pattern is currently temporarily stopped is repeated and the production speed is increased, and as shown in FIG. 76(F), the change of the middle decoration pattern is visually recognized. Difficult high-speed performance display is made. In the effects of FIGS. 76(A) to 76(F), three types of symbols “3”, “4”, and “5” are sequentially displayed one by one, and one symbol is selected from these symbols. It is possible to notify the player that the effect is started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effects.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(G), the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation valid period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including a character “press” and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending to the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one symbol is selected and determined from the three types of symbols “3” “4” “5”. Here, the selection decision informs the player of the selected and decided symbol by stopping (temporary stop or fixed stop) the selected symbol at the display position of the medium decoration symbol.

In FIG. 76(H), the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 representing "4" is stopped, and it is notified that the symbol "4" has been selected from the three types of symbols "3" "4" "5". ing. In FIG. 76(J), the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 representing "5" is stopped, and it is informed that the symbol "5" has been selected from the three types of symbols "3" "4" "5". ing. As shown in FIG. 76(H), the second middle decorative symbol 8C2 representing "4" is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. (Stop display) is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 representing "5" is displayed (stopped display) on the right sub display device 10R at the advanced position (expanded position) that covers the predetermined position of the display screen 7a. ) Will be done. Specifically, when the third middle decoration pattern 8C3 representing "5" is stopped, the third middle decoration pattern 8C3 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as shown in FIG. 76(I). At the same time, the right sub display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position), where it stands (stops). The advanced position (expanded position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The third middle decorative pattern 8C3 that is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered when the right sub display device 10R moves to the advanced position. In other words, the right sub display device 10R stands still (stops) at a position covering a part of the main display device 7 where the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed. At this time, a part of the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. In other words, the right sub display device 10R displays an image corresponding to the portion of the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the right sub display device 10R. That is, the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is gradually displayed in the sub display device 10 while being displayed across the main display device 7 and the right sub display device 10R. The second middle decoration pattern 8C2 and the third middle decoration pattern 8C3 are displayed at substantially the same position with respect to the main display device 7.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76(J), the entire third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed on the right sub display device 10R at the advanced position (expanded position). Note that, in FIG. 76(I), the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the right sub display device 10R is positioned at the advance position (expand position) only for the right sub display. It may be displayed on the display device 10R. In this way, by changing the device to be displayed depending on the type (number) of the image (design) finally selected as the middle decoration design 8C, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected. It can be done and the interest can be improved. Here, when the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 representing "5" which is a big hit is selected, it is displayed on the right sub display device 10R, so that a special feeling can be given to the player.

[Selection B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect B. In the selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selective effect B is executed during the variable effect. Here, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol, a selection effect of selecting one image from a plurality of images showing the jackpot lottery result for the variation is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, 1 out of three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach”. An example of an effect in which two images are selected is shown. Here, after the selection effect, the decorative design is temporarily stopped or stopped so that the result corresponding to the selected image is obtained. That is, when the image of "missing" is selected in the selection effect, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the manner of losing (for example, "456"). When the image of “big hit” is selected in the selection effect, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode (eg, “777”). When the image of "reach" is selected in the selection effect, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the reach mode (for example, "5↓5"). In other words, after the selection effect, effects corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (big hit display, loss display, reach display) are executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect that selects one image from a plurality of types of images. 77(A) to 77(F) of this embodiment suggest that the selection effect in which one image is selected from the three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach” is started. And corresponds to the selection effect start effect. Then, FIG. 77(H) notifies that the “miss” has been selected from the three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach”, and corresponds to the selection decision effect. FIGS. 77(I) to 77(J) inform that the “big hit” has been selected from the three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach”, and this also corresponds to the selection decision effect. To do.

In FIG. 77(A), the first image SG1 representing “miss” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(B) to 77(C), the second image SG2 representing the “big hit” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and overlaps with the first image SG1 and stops. Is displayed. The second image SG2 displayed here is an image having the same size and shape as the first image SG1, and the second image SG2 overlaps in front of the first image SG1 to make it difficult to visually recognize the first image SG1. It becomes a state.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(D) to 77(E), the third image SG3 representing “reach” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second image SG2. The third image SG3 displayed here is an image of the same size and shape as the second image SG2, and because the third image SG3 overlaps in front of the second image SG2, the second image SG2 is difficult to visually recognize. It becomes a state. Then, the first image SG1 having the same size and shape as the third image SG3 moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a to cover the third image SG3. Next, the second image SG2 moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the first image SG1. In this way, the effect of covering the image currently temporarily displayed by the first to third images is repeated and the effect speed is increased, and as shown in FIG. 77(F), the high speed effect in which the replacement of the images is difficult to visually recognize. The display SG is displayed. In the effects of FIGS. 77(A) to 77(F), three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach” are sequentially displayed one by one, and one image is selected from these. It is possible to notify the player that the effect is started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effects.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation valid period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including a character “press” and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending to the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect is executed in which one image is selected and determined from the three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach”. Here, in the selection decision, only the selected image is stopped and displayed at the display position to notify the player of the selection decision image.

In FIG. 77(H), the first image SG1 representing “miss” is stopped, and the fact that “miss” has been selected from the three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach” is notified. In FIG. 77(J), the second image SG2 representing “big hit” is stopped, and it is notified that “big hit” has been selected from the three types of images “miss”, “big hit”, and “reach”. As shown in FIG. 77(H), the first image SG1 representing “miss” is displayed (stopped display) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(J), the second image SG2 representing “big hit” is displayed (stopped) on the right sub display device 10R at a relay position (relay position) that covers a predetermined position on the display screen 7a. R. Specifically, when the second image SG2 representing the “big hit” is stopped, the second image SG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as well as the sub-display as shown in FIG. 77(I). The device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) moves from the retracted position (home position) to the upper relay position (relay position), and stops (stops) at the relay position. The relay position (relay position) is a position that covers the predetermined position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The second image SG2 stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is partially covered by the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R) at the relay position. In other words, the sub display device 10 stops (stops) at a position that covers a part of the main display device 7 where the second image SG2 is displayed. At this time, a part of the second image SG2 covered by the sub display device 10 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (right sub display device 10R). In other words, the sub display device 10 displays an image corresponding to the portion of the second image SG2 displayed on the main display device 7 that is covered by the sub display device 10. That is, in the state where the second image SG2 is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, the portion displayed on the sub display device 10 gradually increases. The first image SG1 and the second image SG2 are displayed at substantially the same position on the main display device 7.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77(J), the entire second image SG2 is displayed on the right sub display device 10R at the relay position (relay position). In FIG. 77(I), the second image SG2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the right sub display device 10R is positioned at the relay position (relay position) for the first time. The mode displayed on 10R may be sufficient. In this way, by changing the device to be displayed depending on the type of the image finally selected as the jackpot lottery result, it is possible to create a special feeling when a specific image is selected, and to improve the interest. be able to. Here, when the second image SG2 representing “big hit” is selected, it is displayed on the right sub display device 10R, so that a special feeling can be given to the player.

[Selection effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect C. In the selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selective effect C is executed during the big hit game. Here, during the big hit game, a selection effect of selecting one image from a plurality of images showing the game state after the big hit game is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, one image is selected from the two types of images “probability variation” and “time saving”. The selected production is illustrated. Here, when the jackpot game ends after the selection effect, the game state corresponding to the selected image is set. That is, when the "probability variation" image is selected in the selection effect, the probability variation state (high-probability high-base state) is set after the jackpot game. When the image of "time saving" is selected in the selection effect, it becomes a time saving state (low accurate high base state) after the big hit game. In other words, after the selection effect, when the jackpot game ends, effects corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (probability variation effect, time saving effect) are executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect that selects one image from a plurality of types of images. 78(A) to 78(F) of this embodiment suggest that the selection effect in which one image is selected from the two types of images "probability variation" and "time saving" is started, It corresponds to the selection effect start effect. And FIG.78(H) alert|reports that "time saving" was selected from two types of image "probability change" "time saving", and corresponds to selection determination production. 78(I) to FIG. 78(J) notify that "probability variation" has been selected from the two types of images "probability variation" and "time saving", and this also corresponds to the selection decision effect.

In FIG. 78(A), the first image SG1 representing “probability change” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(B) to 78(C), the second image SG2 representing “time saving” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the second image SG2 overlaps the first image SG1 and stops. Is displayed. The second image SG2 displayed here is larger than the first image SG1, and the second image SG2 overlaps in front of the first image SG1 to make the first image SG1 difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(D) to 78(E), the first image SG1 representing “probable change” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a and overlaps with the second image SG2. The first image SG1 displayed here is larger than the second image SG2, and the first image SG1 overlaps in front of the second image SG2, so that the second image SG2 is in a visually difficult state. Then, the second image SG2, which is larger than the first image SG1, moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the first image SG1. Next, the first image SG1 moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the second image SG2. In this way, the effect of covering the image in which the first and second images are currently temporarily stopped and displayed is repeated, and the effect speed is increased, and as shown in FIG. 78(F), high-speed effect in which the interchange of images is difficult to visually recognize. The display SG is displayed. In the effects of FIGS. 78(A) to 78(F), two types of images “probability change” and “time saving” are sequentially displayed one by one, and a selection effect in which one image is selected from these is started. It is possible to inform the player that this is done. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effects.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(G), the high-speed effect display SG disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation valid period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including a character “press” and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending to the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect in which one image is selected and determined from the two types of images “probability variation” and “time saving” is executed. Here, in the selection decision, only the selected image is stopped and displayed at the display position to notify the player of the selection decision image.

In FIG. 78(H), the second image SG2 representing “time saving” is stopped, and it is notified that “time saving” has been selected from the two types of images “probability variation” and “time saving”. In FIG. 78(J), the first image SG1 representing “probability variation” is stopped, and “probability variation” is selected from the two types of images “probability variation” and “time saving”. As shown in FIG. 78(H), the second image SG2 representing “time saving” is displayed (stopped display) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78(J), the first image SG1 representing “probability change” is displayed (stopped display) on the right sub display device 10R at the advanced position (expanded position). Specifically, when the first image SG1 representing “probability change” is stopped, as shown in FIG. 78(I), in the state where the first image SG1 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, The right sub display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position), thereby moving to the advance position (deployment position) and stopping (stopping) there. The advanced position (expanded position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(J), the first image SG1 is displayed on the right sub display device 10R at the advanced position (expanded position). An effect image EF, which is a luminescent image, is displayed around the first image SG1. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF notifies that the “probability change” of the first image SG1 has been determined. In addition, in FIG. 78(I), the first image SG1 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In this way, by changing the device to be displayed depending on the type of image finally selected as the game state after the jackpot game, it is possible to produce a special feeling when a specific image is selected. It is possible to improve. Here, when the first image SG1 representing the “probability change” is displayed on the right sub display device 10R, it is possible to give the player a special feeling. The second image SG2 and the first image SG1 are displayed at substantially the same position on the main display device 7.

[Selection D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the selection effect D. In the selection effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). This selective effect D is executed during the variation effect in the probability changing state (high-accuracy high-base state). Here, during the variation effect of the probability variation state, the selection effect of selecting one image from the plurality of images showing the lottery result for the variation is executed. That is, the selection effect is an effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents, and in this embodiment, from the three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “overtime”. An example of an effect in which one image is selected will be described. Here, after the selection effect, the game state corresponding to the selected image is set. That is, when the image of "falling down" is selected in the selection effect, the normal state (low-probability low-base state) is set thereafter. When the image of "continue" is selected in the selection effect, the probability variation state (high-precision high-base state) continues as it is. When the image of "big hit" is selected in the selection effect, the big hit game is executed. In other words, after the selection effect, effects corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect (normal state effect, time saving state effect, jackpot game effect) are executed.

The selection effect includes a selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started, and a selection determination effect that selects one image from a plurality of types of images. FIGS. 79(A) to 79(F) of this embodiment suggest that the selection effect in which one image is selected from the three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “large hit” is started. This corresponds to the selection effect start effect. Then, FIG. 79(H) informs that “fall” has been selected from the three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “large hit”, and corresponds to the selection decision effect. FIG. 79(I) to FIG. 79(J) inform that the “large hit” has been selected from the three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “large hit”, and this also indicates the selection decision effect. Corresponds to.

In FIG. 79(A), the left symbol LS, the right symbol RS, and the first middle symbol CS1 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left symbol LS and the right symbol RS are images represented as "falling down" and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The first middle symbol CS1 is an image represented as “fall”, and is temporarily stopped and displayed between the left symbol LS and the right symbol RS. Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(B) to 79(C), the second middle symbol CS2 representing “continuation” moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and overlaps with the first middle symbol CS1. Will be stopped and displayed. The second middle symbol CS2 displayed here is larger than the first middle symbol CS1 and the second middle symbol CS2 overlaps in front of the first middle symbol CS1 to make the first middle symbol CS1 difficult to see. Become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D) to FIG. 79(E), the third middle symbol CS3, which represents “large win”, moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the second middle symbol CS2 is displayed. Overlap. The third middle symbol CS3 displayed here is larger than the second middle symbol CS2, and the third middle symbol CS3 overlaps in front of the second middle symbol CS2, so that the second middle symbol CS2 is difficult to see. Become. After that, the first middle symbol CS1 larger than the third middle symbol CS3 moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the third middle symbol CS3. Next, the second middle symbol CS2 moves downward from above the display screen 7a to cover the first middle symbol CS1. In this way, the production speed of the first to third middle symbols covering the middle symbols currently temporarily displayed is repeated and the production speed is increased, and as shown in FIG. 79(F), the change of the middle symbols is difficult to visually recognize. A high speed effect display CS is made. In the effects of FIGS. 79(A) to 79(F), three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “daily hit” are sequentially displayed one by one, and one image is selected from these. It is possible to notify the player that the selective effect is started. That is, these effects correspond to the selection effect start effects.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(G), the high-speed effect display CS disappears, and the button image BTN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed on the display screen 7a. The button image BTN is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI represents the operation valid period of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND is an image including a character “press” and an arrow pointing downward, and is an image for recommending to the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, a selection determination effect in which one image is selected and determined from the three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “large win” is executed. Here, in the selection decision, only the selected image is stopped and displayed at the display position to notify the player of the selection decision image.

In FIG. 79(H), the first middle symbol CS1 representing “fall” is stopped, and “fall” is selected from the three types of images “fall”, “continue”, and “bonus” There is. In FIG. 79(J), the third medium symbol CS3 representing “Otowa” is stopped, and it is notified that “Otowa” has been selected from the three types of images “fall”, “continue” and “Otowa”. doing. As shown in FIG. 79(H), the first middle symbol CS1 representing “fall” is displayed (stopped display) at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 79(J), the third middle symbol CS3 representing “Ohto” is displayed (stopped display) on the right sub display device 10R at the advanced position (expanded position). Specifically, when the third middle symbol CS3 representing “Ohto” is stopped, the third middle symbol CS3 is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 79(I). In this state, the right sub display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates counterclockwise at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) where it stands (stops). .. The advanced position (expanded position) is a position that covers the predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(J), the third middle symbol CS3 is displayed on the right sub display device 10R at the advanced position (expanded position). An effect image EF, which is a luminescent image, is displayed around the third middle symbol CS3. The effect image EF is displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. This effect image EF informs that the "large win" of the third middle symbol CS3 has been confirmed. Note that, in FIG. 79(I), the third middle symbol CS3 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In this way, by changing the device to be displayed according to the type of image that is finally selected during the variation effect in the probability variation state (high-accuracy high-base state), a special feeling when a specific image is selected is produced. It is possible to improve the enjoyment. Here, when the third middle symbol CS3 representing "big win" is displayed on the right sub display device 10R, it is possible to give the player a special feeling. The first middle symbol CS1 and the third middle symbol CS3 are displayed at substantially the same position with respect to the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of selection production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents by using the sub display device 10 and the main display device 7. It is possible to execute the selected effect. In the selection effect of FIG. 76, when the third medium decoration pattern 8C3, which is one of a plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected third medium decoration pattern 8C3 is displayed on the sub display device 10, and the plurality of types are selected. When the second middle decoration pattern 8C2, which is one of the images of, is selected, the selected second middle decoration pattern 8C2 is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 77(H) to (J), FIGS. 78(H) to (J), and FIGS. 79(H) to (J).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 79, the sub display device 10 is configured to be movable, and the third middle decorative symbol 8C3 is selected in the selection effect of FIG. In this case, the sub display device 10 moves from the first position to the second position, and the third middle decorative pattern 8C3 is displayed at the second position (FIG. 76(J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 77(J), 78(J) and 79(J).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, when the second medium decoration pattern 8C2 is selected in the selection effect, the second medium decoration is provided at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. When the symbol 8C2 is displayed and the third medium decorative symbol 8C3 is selected, the sub display device 10 stops at the advanced position that covers the predetermined position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the third medium decorative symbol 8C3 is displayed. It is displayed (FIG. 76(J)). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 77(J), 78(J) and 79(J).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 76(A) to 76(F), 77(A) to 77(F), 78(A) to 78(F), 79(A). As shown in FIG. 79(F), as the selection effect, one image is selected from a plurality of types of images after the selection start suggestion effect that suggests that the selection effect is started and after the selection start suggestion effect. In the selection start suggestion effect, a plurality of types of images are sequentially displayed one by one on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, FIGS. 76(A) to 76(F), 77(A) to 77(F), 78(A) to 78(F), 79(A). As shown in FIG. 79(F), in the selection start suggestion effect, when a plurality of types of images are sequentially displayed one by one on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the first image is displayed. After that, a second image larger than the first image is displayed at a position covering the first image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with the effect button 63 that can be operated by the player, and is shown in FIG. 76(G) to FIG. 76(J), FIG. 77(G) to FIG. 77(J), and FIG. G) to FIG. 78(J) and FIG. 79(G) to FIG. 79(J), when the effect button 63 is operated after the selection start effect, the selection determination effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the plurality of types of images are associated with one of the plurality of types of effects executed after the selected effects, respectively. Then, the effect corresponding to the image selected in the selected effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of selection production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the selection effect A of FIG. 76, the selection effect C of FIG. 78, and the selection effect D of FIG. 79, the right sub display device 10R is assumed to move. However, the left sub display device 10L may be configured to move.

[Modification 2]
In the selection effect B of FIG. 77, both the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R of the sub display device 10 are assumed to move upward. However, a configuration may be adopted in which only the right sub display device 10R moves upward and the left sub display device 10L does not move upward.

[Modification 3]
The contents of the respective selection effects A to D in FIGS. 76 to 79 may be combined appropriately. For example, in the selection effect C of FIG. 78, as in the selection effect D of FIG. 79, the left symbol LS and the right symbol RS may be displayed on both sides of the first image SG1 and the second image SG2.

[Modification 5]
In each of the selected effects A to D of FIGS. 76 to 79, some of the effects described may not be provided, or other effects may be added. For example, in the selection effect D of FIG. 79, when the second middle symbol CS2 is selected, the second middle symbol CS2 may be displayed on the right sub display device 10R at the advance position, or the display screen of the main display device 7. It may be displayed on 7a. Further, the second middle symbol CS2 may be randomly displayed on the right sub display device 10R at the advance position, or may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
First display means capable of displaying an image,
A gaming machine comprising: a second display means capable of displaying an image,
By using the first display means and the second display means, it is possible to execute a selection effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images having different contents,
In the selection effect,
When the first image, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected first image is displayed on the first display means,
When the second image, which is one of the plurality of types of images, is selected, the selected second image is displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1,
The first display means is configured to be movable,
In the selection effect,
When the first image is selected, the first display unit moves from the first position to the second position, and the first image is displayed at the second position,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2,
In the selection effect,
When the second image is selected, the second image is displayed at a predetermined position of the second display means,
When the first image is selected, the first display means stops at a second position that covers the predetermined position of the second display means, and the first image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The selection effect is
A selection start suggesting effect that suggests that the selection effect is started,
After the selection start suggestion effect, a selection determination effect in which one image is selected from a plurality of types of images,
In the selection start suggestion effect, the plurality of types of images are sequentially displayed one by one on the second display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4,
In the selection start suggestive production,
When the plurality of types of images are sequentially displayed one by one on the second display means, after the first image is displayed, the second image larger than the first image is displayed. Displayed in a position that covers the first image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-4 or A5-5,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
After the selection start effect, when the operation means is operated, the selection determination effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
The plurality of types of images are respectively associated with one of a plurality of types of effects executed after the selection effect,
After the selection effect, an effect corresponding to the image selected in the selection effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The plural image pseudo continuous effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. This multiple image pseudo continuous production can be executed during the variation production of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Multi-image pseudo continuous production A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image pseudo continuous effect A. In the multi-image pseudo continuous production A, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a decorative symbol variation production is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative design 8L is provisionally stopped at "7 design", the decorative design 8R is provisionally stopped at "8 design", and the decorative design 8C is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo continuous production, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed over the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R. This pseudo continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown and suggests a pseudo continuous effect. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, the character CRA performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

[Multiple image pseudo continuous production B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image pseudo continuous effect B. In the multi-image pseudo continuous effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative design 8L is provisionally stopped at "7 design", the decorative design 8R is provisionally stopped at "8 design", and the decorative design 8C is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L, and the pseudo continuous image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. This pseudo continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown and suggests a pseudo continuous effect. Further, the pseudo continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the letters "NEXT" are shown and suggest the pseudo continuous effect. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, the character CRA performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

[Multiple image pseudo continuous production C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image pseudo continuous effect C. In the multiple image pseudo continuous effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative design 8L is provisionally stopped at "7 design", the decorative design 8R is provisionally stopped at "8 design", and the decorative design 8C is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L, the pseudo continuous image ZC3 is displayed on the right sub display device 10R, and the pseudo continuous image ZC4. Is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This pseudo continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown and suggests a pseudo continuous effect. Further, the pseudo continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the letters "NEXT" are shown and suggest the pseudo continuous effect. Further, the pseudo continuous image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and in the illumination panel 18, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device. It is displayed in an area other than the area (portion) corresponding to the pseudo continuous image ZC3 displayed in 10R. In this case, in the illumination panel 18, the areas corresponding to the pseudo continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3 are transparent areas that are transparent. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, the character CRA performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

[Multiple image pseudo continuous production D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the multiple image pseudo continuous effect D. In the multi-image pseudo continuous effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped to suggest a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, the decorative design 8L is provisionally stopped at "7 design", the decorative design 8R is provisionally stopped at "8 design", and the decorative design 8C is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a pseudo continuous effect is performed. In this pseudo continuous production, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a (near the development position of the left sub display device 10L), the pseudo continuous image ZC2 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L, and the pseudo continuous image ZC3. Is displayed on the right sub display device 10R, and the pseudo continuous image ZC4 is displayed on the illumination panel 18. This pseudo continuous image ZC1 is an image in which the characters "NEXT" are shown and suggests a pseudo continuous effect. Further, the pseudo continuous images ZC2 and ZC3 are also images in which the letters "NEXT" are shown and suggest the pseudo continuous effect. Further, the pseudo continuous image ZC4 is an image of a star pattern, and in the illumination panel 18, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 displayed on the display screen 7a, the pseudo continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device. It is displayed in an area other than the area (portion) corresponding to the pseudo continuous image ZC3 displayed in 10R. In this case, in the illumination panel 18, the areas corresponding to the pseudo continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3 are transparent areas that are transparent. Further, in the pseudo continuous effect, the character CRA is displayed across the right sub display device 10R and the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the button image ZC5 is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo continuous image ZC1 on the display screen 7a. The button image ZC5 is an image representing the effect button 63, and is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63. Further, in this button display effect, in the illumination panel 18, the area corresponding to the button image ZC5 on the display screen 7a is a transparent area. In other words, on the illumination panel 18, the pseudo continuous image ZC4 is displayed in an area other than the areas corresponding to the pseudo continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, ZC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a sub display device movement effect is performed. In this sub display device movement effect, when the player who sees the button image ZC5 depresses (button push) the effect button 63, the left sub display device 10L rotationally moves from the home position to the expanded position, A part of the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. That is, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L. In this case, the pseudo continuous image ZC2 displayed on the left sub display device 10L is erased. Further, in the illumination panel 18, the region corresponding to the left sub display device 10L is a transmissive region. In other words, on the illumination panel 18, the pseudo continuous image ZC4 is displayed in an area other than the area corresponding to the pseudo continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and the left sub display device 10L. That is, in this sub display device movement effect, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the pseudo continuous image ZC2, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the left sub display device 10L moves and the pseudo continuous image on the left sub display device 10L. By displaying ZC1, a pseudo continuous effect or an effect that suggests continuation of the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, the character CRA performs a predetermined action on the display screen 7a.

The multiple image pseudo continuous production is performed with the same variation. However, it may be performed with different variations.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned multiple image pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous images ZC1, ZC2, ZC3, and ZC4 are images forming the pseudo continuous effect, but the pseudo continuous effect is continued or the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Suggestions may be included.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of multiple image pseudo continuous production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the above-described multiple image pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous effect is performed using the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10. According to this configuration, since it is possible to perform a dynamic pseudo continuous production using two display devices, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.
In the multi-image pseudo continuous effect D, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed when the left sub display device 10L moves to the expansion position in the sub display device movement effect, but pseudo continuous images other than the pseudo continuous image ZC1 (for example, , The pseudo continuous image ZC2 or a new pseudo continuous image) may be displayed.
In the multi-image pseudo continuous effect D, the button image ZC5 is displayed on the display screen 7a in the button display effect, but is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, on the pseudo continuous image) on the sub display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. May be.

[Effect 2]
In the multi-image pseudo continuous effect, the pseudo continuous image ZC1 capable of forming the pseudo continuous effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the pseudo continuous image ZC2, ZC3 capable of forming the pseudo continuous effect on the sub display device 10 or the illumination panel 18. ZC4 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to display the pseudo-repeated images on two or more display devices and perform a dynamic pseudo-reproduced effect, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-described image pseudo continuous effect, the sub-display device 10 or the illumination panel 18 on which the pseudo continuous images ZC2, ZC3, ZC4 that can form the pseudo continuous effect are displayed are the pseudo continuous images ZC1 that can form the pseudo continuous effect. It is arranged on the front side of the displayed display screen 7a. According to this configuration, two pseudo continuous images can be three-dimensionally expressed, and a stereoscopic and dynamic pseudo continuous effect can be performed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
The multiple image pseudo continuous production is performed in the same variation. According to this configuration, since the effect of displaying the two pseudo continuous images can be a series of display effects, it is possible to create a stereoscopic and dynamic pseudo continuous effect and improve the enjoyment of the game. it can.

[Effect 5]
In the above-described multiple image pseudo continuous effect, when the pseudo continuous image ZC1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, in the illumination panel 18, a transparent area is provided in an area different from the area where the pseudo continuous image ZC4 is displayed, and The continuous image ZC1 is configured to be visible through the transparent area of the illumination panel 18. According to this configuration, since the pseudo continuous image ZC1 can be seen through the transparent area of the illumination panel 18, it is possible to create an exciting feeling of the pseudo continuous effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZC-1]
A gaming machine comprising a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
The first display means and the second display means can respectively execute a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a predetermined effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As the predetermined effect, a pseudo continuous effect using the first display means and the second display means is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-2]
A gaming machine described in ZC-1,
As the predetermined display effect, a first pseudo continuous image that can form the pseudo continuous effect is displayed on the first display means, and a second pseudo continuous effect that can form the pseudo continuous effect on the second display means. Pseudo-sequential images are displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-3]
A gaming machine described in ZC-2,
The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-4]
A gaming machine described in ZC-3,
The predetermined display effect is performed in the same variation,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZC-5]
A gaming machine described in ZC-4,
In the predetermined display effect, when the first pseudo continuous image is displayed on the first display unit, the second display unit displays an area where the second pseudo continuous image is displayed. Is provided with a transparent area that is transparent to different areas, and the first pseudo continuous image is visible through the transparent area of the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
The operation portion image (button image) is displayed on the first pseudo continuous image, and an effect or a pseudo continuous effect that suggests continuous pseudo continuous is performed by pushing the button.
By pushing the button, the third display means is moved to the front of the first pseudo continuous image on the first display means, and the first pseudo continuous image is displayed on the third display means.
-When the third display means moves, the second pseudo continuous image disappears.

The image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. This image display effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is read. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, in the image display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Image display effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a continuation notice effect is executed. In the continuation notice production, the production notice image PNG1 “Continue” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In the effect preview image PNG1, the characters "CONTINUE" are arranged in the horizontal direction. The effect suggested by "continuation" is a pseudo-continuous effect. “NEXT” may be used instead of “continue”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advance position, as indicated by an arrow YG2. Here again, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect in which the same effect notice image PNG2 as the effect notice image PNG1 in the continuation notice effect is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. In the effect preview image PNG2, the characters "CONTINUE" are arranged vertically. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), the re-variation effect is executed. This re-fluctuation effect is an effect for re-changing the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R for the pseudo-relation. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L returns to the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

[Image display effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a continuation notice effect is executed. In the continuation notice production, the production notice image PNG1 “Continue” is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. In the effect preview image PNG1, the characters "CONTINUE" are arranged in the horizontal direction. The effect suggested by "continuation" is a pseudo-continuous effect. “NEXT” may be used instead of “continue”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advance position, as indicated by an arrow YG2. Here again, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect in which the same effect notice image PNG2 as the effect notice image PNG1 in the continuation notice effect is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. In the effect preview image PNG2, the characters "CONTINUE" are arranged vertically. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), the re-variation effect is executed. This re-fluctuation effect is an effect for re-changing the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R for the pseudo-relation. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L returns to the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

[Image display effect C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the chance effect is executed. In the chance production, the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the message image MG1 is "Geki Atsu", and the characters "Geki Atsu" are arranged in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advance position, as indicated by an arrow YG2. Here again, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), an image display effect is executed. This image display effect is an effect in which a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 in the chance effect is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. In the message image MG2, the characters “Gekiatsu” are vertically arranged. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. And when the teammate character CRA wins, it becomes a big hit. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the reserved image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect that fixes the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example is shown in which all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are “5”. In addition, the display of the reserved image 9C on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Image display effect D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the image display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the chance effect is executed. In the chance production, the message image MG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, the message image MG is “Geki Atsu”, and the characters “Geki Atsu” are arranged in the lateral direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. And when the teammate character CRA wins, it becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This fixed stop effect (loose) is an effect for stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. Here, an example in which both the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are "5" and the middle effect design 8C is "4" is shown. In addition, the display of the reserved image 9C on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears with the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In FIG. 86, a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, in FIG. 87, the message image MG is displayed only on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and is not displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the image display effect C shown in FIG. 86 has a higher expectation for a jackpot than the image display effect D shown in FIG. 87.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of image display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the effect preview image PNG1 on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the same effect preview image PNG2 as the effect preview image PNG1 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. (FIG. 84(C)(F), FIG. 85(C)(F)). Further, after displaying the message image MG1 on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 86(C)(F). ). According to this configuration, the production notice image and the message image can be highlighted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub display device 10L is moved (FIG. 84(D)(E), FIG. 85(D)(E), FIG. 86(D)(E)), and left sub display. The production notice image PNG2 and the message image MG2 are displayed on the display screen of the device 10L. According to this configuration, since the left sub display device 10L is moved, the effect notice image and the message image can be highlighted, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left sub-display device 10L moves from the retracted position to the advance position so as to cover the effect notice image PNG1 and the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the production notice image and the message image can be highlighted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after displaying the effect preview image PNG2 and the message image MG2 on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the left sub display device 10L is returned to the retracted position. According to this configuration, the production notice image and the message image can be highlighted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, while the left sub display device 10L is moving, the image of the portion of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 covered by the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the left sub display device 10L. It can be displayed on the display screen (FIG. 85(D)(E), FIG. 86(D)(E)). According to this configuration, since the display of the display screen 7a is not hindered by the movement of the left sub display device 10L, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the message image MG2 similar to the message image MG1 displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 86), the message is displayed only on the display screen 7a. Compared with the case where the image MG is displayed (FIG. 87), the expectation for the jackpot is higher. According to this configuration, the display on the left sub display device 10L is expected to be increased, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, effect preview images PNG1 and PNG2 for predicting an effect to be executed later are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to give an impression of the effect to be executed later, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an image display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the production was performed using the left sub display device 10L, but in addition to or in place of the left sub display device 10L, the production notice image or message image may be displayed using the right sub display device 10R.

[Modification 2]
In the above description, the message image “Gekiatsu” is taken as an example, but the message image is not limited to this. For example, various images such as the number of acquired game balls, an instruction during a game such as “right hit”, “Congratulations” when a big hit, and a title display indicating the type of a big hit are targeted.

[Modification 3]
In the above description, when the left sub display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the other hand, when the left sub display device 10L is moved, the reserved image 9A may be displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A7-1]
A first display device capable of displaying an image and performing an effect;
A game machine having a second display device different from the first display device,
After the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the first display device, an effect control unit capable of displaying the same image as the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device is provided. A gaming machine.

[Aspect A7-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
The effect control means displays the predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device, then moves the second display device, and displays the same image as the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device. A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A7-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-2,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect control means moves the second display device from the origin position so as to cover the predetermined image.

[Aspect A7-4]
A gaming machine described in Aspect A7-3,
The game machine, wherein the effect control means returns the second display device to the origin position after displaying an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-2 to A7-4,
The effect control means displays an image of a portion covered by the second display device on the display screen of the first display device on the display screen of the second display device while the second display device is moving. A game machine characterized by being possible.

[Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5,
When the effect control unit displays a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device and then displays an image similar to the predetermined image on the display screen of the second display device, the display of the first display device is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by a higher expectation for jackpots than when a predetermined image is displayed only on the screen.

[Aspect A7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-6,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined image is a notice image for giving notice of an effect to be executed later.

[Aspect A7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-7,
The effect control means is capable of displaying a hold image corresponding to the hold storage on the display screen of the second display device, and when the hold image is not displayed on the second display device, the first display device displays the hold image. A gaming machine characterized by displaying information related to a reserved image.

The sub display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. This sub-display effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the sub display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is read. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10. In the sub display effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the sub display device 10 via the lamp control board 107.

[Sub display effect A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the sub display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG “Development” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advance position, as indicated by an arrow YG2. Also here, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. Here, a message image "Atsuizo" is displayed. In addition, the message image of "Atsuizo" is displayed so as to be superimposed on the battle image.
In addition, in FIGS. 88(D), (E), and (F), the battle effect is executed in parallel with the above-described effect. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. When the teammate character CRA wins in the battle production, the expectation for the jackpot increases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that the middle effect symbol 8C, “3”, is changing downward as shown by the arrow YG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect that the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, it is shown that the intermediate effect symbol 8C, "5", is stopped.

[Sub display effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the sub display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG “Development” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the teammate character CRA wins here, the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases. In the battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot parts of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the message image of "Geki" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the message image of "Atsu" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variably displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the left portion of the medium effect symbol 8C, "3", is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the right portion of the medium effect symbol 8C, "3", is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The portion is displayed and is moving downward as indicated by arrow YG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at "5". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the suspension image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[Sub display effect C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the sub display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advance position, as indicated by an arrow YG2. The image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a special symbol stop effect is executed. This special symbol stop effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the middle effect symbol 8C on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advance position, and this middle effect symbol 8C is an effect that is a special symbol. Here, the intermediate effect design 8C called "development" is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the teammate character CRA wins here, the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases. In the battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot parts of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the message image of "Geki" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the message image of "Atsu" is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The message image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the battle effect image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at "5". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the suspension image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[Sub display effect D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the sub display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), the reach development effect is executed. In the reach development effect, the message image MSG “Development” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a linear movement effect is executed. This linear movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L linearly moves from the retracted position to the relay position, as indicated by the arrow YG1. At this time, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a rotational movement effect is executed. This rotational movement effect is an effect in which the left sub display device 10L rotates and moves from the relay position toward the advance position, as indicated by an arrow YG2. Here again, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Further, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L of the image of the display device 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a message addition effect is executed. This message addition effect is an effect of displaying a message image on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that has moved to the advance position. Here, a message image "Atsuizo" is displayed. In addition, the message image of "Atsuizo" is displayed so as to be superimposed on the battle image.
91(D)(E)(F), the battle effect is executed in parallel with the above-described effect. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. When the teammate character CRA wins in the battle production, the expectation for the jackpot increases. Further, during the battle effect, the hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a middle symbol variation effect is executed. The middle symbol variation effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is variably displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub-display device 10L, it is shown that the middle effect symbol 8C, “3”, is changing downward as shown by the arrow YG3. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. This middle symbol stop effect is an effect that the middle effect symbol 8C, which is one of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display device 7a, is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, it is shown that the intermediate effect symbol 8C, "5", is stopped. The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of sub-display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed by using the display screen of the sub display device 10 (FIG. 88(D)(E)( F), FIG. 89(D)(E), FIG. 90(C)(D)(F)(G), and FIG. 91(D)(E)(F). Further, the hold screen 9A is displayed using the display screen of the sub display device 10 (FIGS. 88(A)(B)(C), FIGS. 89(A)(B)(C)(G), and FIG. 90). (A) (B) (H), FIG. 91 (A) (B) (C)). Furthermore, the display screen of the sub display device 10 is used to display the medium effect design 8C (FIG. 88(G)(H), FIG. 89(F), FIG. 90(E), FIG. 91(G)( H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by various effects on the sub display device 10.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the image of the portion covered by the sub display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 (Fig. 88 ( F), FIG. 89(D)(E), FIG. 90(F)(G), and FIG. 91(F). With this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, while moving the left sub display device 10L, the image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. (FIG. 88(D)(E), FIG. 90(C)(D), FIG. 91(D)(E)). With this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a message image can be displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 together with a part of the image on the display screen 7a (FIG. 88(F), FIG. 89(E), FIG. 90(G) and FIG. 91(F)). With this configuration, the effect on the display screen 7a can be further enhanced, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the stop display of the intermediate effect design 8C is performed using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 88(H), FIG. 90(E), FIG. 91(H)). .. According to this configuration, it is possible to make an expectation for the stop effect of the intermediate effect design 8C, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display screen of the sub display device 10 is used to perform the variable display of the intermediate effect design 8C (FIG. 88(G), FIG. 89(F), FIG. 91(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make an expectation for the subsequent stop effect of the middle effect design 8C, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a sub display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in one variation, the display screen of the sub display device 10 is used to display a part of the image displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the reserved image 9A is displayed, and the intermediate effect design 8C. Is displayed. On the other hand, it is not necessary to do everything during one change.
[Modification 2]
In the above, the message image of "Atsuizo" or "Gekiatsu" is displayed over the battle image in the message addition effect. On the other hand, instead of the battle image, only the message image may be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A8-1]
A first display device capable of displaying an image and performing an effect;
A game machine having a second display device different from the first display device,
By using the display screen of the second display device, a part of the image displayed on the display screen of the first display device is displayed, and the first effect and the hold storage that compose the image together with the first display device are stored. A second effect for displaying a corresponding pending image, and effect control means capable of performing a third effect for displaying a predetermined row of effect symbols on the display screen of the first display device. A gaming machine.

[Aspect A8-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
The effect control means displays, on the display screen of the second display device, an image of a portion covered by the second display device among the images displayed on the display screen of the first display device in the first effect. A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
The effect control means is capable of moving the second display device in the first effect, and displays a portion covered by the second display device during the movement of the second display device by the second display. A game machine characterized by being capable of being displayed on the display screen of the device.

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-3,
In the first effect, the effect control means is capable of displaying another image on the second display device, overlapping or replacing the image of the portion covered by the second display device. A gaming machine.

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-4,
The effect control means, in the third effect, performing a stop display of a predetermined row of effect symbols on the first display device, a gaming machine.

[Aspect A8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-5,
The effect control means, in the third effect, performing a variable display of a predetermined row of effect symbols on the first display device, a game machine.

[Aspect A8-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-6,
The effect control means displays the hold image corresponding to the hold storage on a display screen of a display device different from the second display device in at least one of the first effect and the third effect. Characteristic gaming machine.

The holding arrangement direction change effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This holding arrangement direction change effect may be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the reserved arrangement direction change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image data is read out. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the reserved arrangement direction change effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R. ) Position and tilt.

[Reservation array direction change effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the reserved array direction change effect A. In the reserved arrangement direction change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub display device 10L, hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a holding arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of holding icons 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L changes is executed. In this embodiment, when the left sub display device 10L is stationary without changing its position or posture, the display positions of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are changed. A mode in which the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) is changed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 92(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 92(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as "2" is formed. At this time, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position) and stops at the relay position. During the upward movement of the sub display device 10, the four hold icons 9A are kept displayed. That is, when the sub display device 10 is moved upward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. ..

As shown in FIG. 92(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-relation suggestive image represented as "ream" indicating that the pseudo-relation is started is displayed as the medium decoration pattern 8C. .. At this time, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) stands still at the relay position, and in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is changed. It switches from horizontal to vertical. In this switching, the display of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the horizontal direction may disappear, and the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction may be newly displayed, or the display of the four hold icons 9A maintained. Then, the arrangement direction may be gradually switched from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. Here, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A is horizontal. That is, each of the hold icons 9A is displayed tilted by 90 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 92(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an image represented as "second time!!", which indicates that the second time of the pseudo run is started, is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(E), a third reach is formed. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(F), a battle effect is executed. At this time, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) stands still at the relay position, and in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is changed. A production that changes continuously is performed. In other words, an effect in which the angles in the direction in which the four hold icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) is continuously changed is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92C, of the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction, the fourth hold on the top is the rotation axis, and the first to 3 Hold moves left rotation. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92D to 92E, the horizontal direction of the left sub display device 10L is approached, and finally, as shown in FIG. The state is along the horizontal direction of 10 L. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes in accordance with the change in the arrangement direction. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

As shown in FIG. 92(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the battle effect, the player is defeated and the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a lost form. At this time, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) moves from the relay position toward the retracted position (home position) below and stops at the retracted position. During the downward movement of the sub display device 10, the four hold icons 9A are kept displayed. That is, by moving the sub display device 10 downward, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. ..

As shown in FIG. 92(H), the following variable display is made on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) stands still at the retracted position, and the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L) has a hold count of 3 due to the hold exhaustion. Three hold icons 9A are displayed. Here, an effect in which the arrangement directions of the three hold icons 9A continuously change is performed. In the middle of this effect, as shown in FIG. 92(I), when the variable display ends on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) is displayed. The holding number icon 2A of) is set to 2 due to holding down. At this time, the hold icon 9A continuously produces an effect in which the arrangement direction continuously changes. As shown in FIG. 92(J), when the number (holding number) of holding icons 9A of the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10L) becomes 1, one holding icon 9A has two or more holdings. In this case, the display position changes so that the arrangement direction changes. Further, the inclination of the hold icon 9A also changes.

[Reservation array direction change effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the reserved array direction change effect B. In the reserved arrangement direction change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontal direction) in a straight line. Here, a holding arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of holding icons 9A displayed on the main display device 7 or the left sub display device 10L is changed is executed. In this embodiment, by changing the display position of the plurality of holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of holding icons 9A changes, and The left sub display, in which the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) is changed by changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L An example is shown in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes as the posture of the device 10L changes.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 93(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an effect is produced in which the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A continuously changes. In other words, an effect in which the angles in the direction in which the four hold icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) is continuously changed is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(A), of the four holding icons 9A arranged in the horizontal direction, the rightmost first holding is used as the rotation axis, and the second to 4 Hold moves clockwise. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 93(B) to 93(C), the arrangement directions of the four hold icons 9A approach the vertical direction, and finally, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the four hold icons 9A are finally arranged. The arrangement direction of 9A becomes vertical. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes in accordance with the change in the arrangement direction. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C) and FIG. 93(D), the moving effect of the four vertically arranged holding icons 9A is executed. Specifically, the four vertically arranged hold icons 9A move in the horizontal direction (to the right) while maintaining the display. In other words, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal (intersecting) to the arrangement direction (vertical direction). Then, it stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the four hold icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction incline to the left while maintaining the display, and stop in that state. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(F), the four holding icons 9A move upward in a tilted state. Also in this case, the four hold icons 9A arranged diagonally move in the vertical direction (upward) while maintaining the display. In other words, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) that intersects the arrangement direction (oblique). Then, it stops at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The four hold icons 9A may be framed out from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 without being stopped at a predetermined position of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(G), the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the left sub display device 10L after disappearing from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 93(H), the left sub-display device 10L moves upward from the retracted position (home position) and rotates right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position). Move to and stop (stop) there. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is changed by the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes as the sub display device 10L rotates to the right. That is, the orientation of each of the hold icons 9A changes so that the orientation of the icon matches the arrangement direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(I), the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A continuously changes while the left sub display device 10L is stationary (stopped) at the advanced position (expanded position). Directing is done. In other words, an effect in which the angles in the direction in which the four hold icons 9A are arranged (arrangement direction) is continuously changed is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93(I) and FIG. 93(J), the four hold icons 9A are in a state in which the arrangement direction is inclined to the right and a state in which the arrangement direction is inclined to the left. While swinging alternately, the left sub display device 10L moves downward from above.

[Reservation array direction change effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the reserved array direction change effect C. In the hold arrangement direction change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub display device 10L, hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a holding arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of holding icons 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L changes is executed. This embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes as the posture of the left sub display device 10L changes.

As shown in FIG. 94(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) linearly in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 94(B), the left sub display device 10L moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position). During the upward movement of the left sub display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A maintain the display. That is, by moving the left sub display device 10L upward, the four holding icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the holding icons 9A while maintaining the display. To do.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94(C) to 94(D), the left sub display device 10L rotates to the right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and stop there. (Stop. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is changed by the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes as the sub display device 10L rotates to the right. That is, each of the hold icons 9A changes its orientation so that the icon orientation matches the arrangement direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 94(E), the four hold icons 9A disappear on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advanced position (expanded position). At this time, another image may be displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L instead of the hold icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 94(F) to 94(H), the left sub display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and at the retracted position. Stop (stop). At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the left rotation of the left sub display device 10L changes the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A. .. Further, by downward movement of the left sub display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94(I) to 94(J), the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the left sub display device 10L. In this state, the left sub display device 10L rotates to the right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deploy position), and stops (stops) there. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A and the four hold icons 9B are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L causes the respective hold icons 9A and 9B to be changed. The arrangement direction changes. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A and 9B is also changed by the right rotation of the sub display device 10L. That is, each of the hold icons 9A and 9B changes its orientation so that the icon orientation matches the arrangement direction.

[Reservation direction change effect D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the reserved array direction change effect D. In the reserved arrangement direction change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). .. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as "2" is formed. On the left sub display device 10L, hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, a holding arrangement direction change effect in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of holding icons 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L changes is executed. This embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the arrangement direction (arrangement direction) of the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L changes as the posture of the left sub display device 10L changes. The specific image TG is also displayed on the left sub display device 10L. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a smile face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 95(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a pseudo-relationship suggestive image represented as "ream" is displayed as a medium decoration pattern 8C, which indicates that the pseudo-repeation is started. .. At this time, the left sub display device 10L moves from the retracted position toward the upper relay position (relay position). During the upward movement of the left sub display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A maintain the display. That is, by moving the left sub display device 10L upward, the four holding icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the holding icons 9A while maintaining the display. To do.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95(C) to 95(D), the left sub display device 10L rotates to the right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and stop there. (Stop. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is changed by the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes as the sub display device 10L rotates to the right. That is, each of the hold icons 9A changes its orientation so that the icon orientation matches the arrangement direction. Since the specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the tilt of the specific image TG also changes with the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), the four hold icons 9A and the specific image TG disappear on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advanced position (expanded position). After that, an image represented as "second time" is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, which indicates that the second time of the pseudo-relation is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 95(F) to 95(H), the left sub display device 10L moves from the advanced position (deployed position) to the retracted position (home position) by left rotation and downward movement, and at the retracted position. Stop (stop). At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the left rotation of the left sub display device 10L changes the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A. .. Further, by downward movement of the left sub display device 10L, the four hold icons 9A move in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to (intersecting) the arrangement direction (horizontal direction) of the hold icons 9A while maintaining the display. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(G), the second variable display is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a reach in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at "6" is formed, and it is suggested that the pseudo-relation is started as the middle decorative design 8C. A pseudo-relationship suggestive image represented as "ream" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95(I) to 95(J), the left sub display device 10L rotates to the right at the relay position (relay position) to move to the advance position (deployment position) and stop there. (Stop. At this time, since the four hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the arrangement direction of the four hold icons 9A is changed by the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L. The inclination of each of the hold icons 9A changes as the sub display device 10L rotates to the right. That is, each of the hold icons 9A changes its orientation so that the icon orientation matches the arrangement direction. Since the specific image TG is also displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the tilt of the specific image TG also changes with the right rotation of the left sub display device 10L. As shown in FIG. 95(J), the four holding icons 9A and the specific image TG disappear on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L that is stationary (stopped) at the advance position (deployment position), and the left sub display device An image represented as "3rd time" is displayed on the 10 L display screen, which suggests that the pseudo-reaction third time is started.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the holding array direction change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, the arrangement direction in which the direction in which the plurality of hold icons are arranged changes by changing the display position of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the sub display device 10. A change effect can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, by changing the display positions of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the main display device 7, it is possible to execute the arrangement direction change effect in which the direction in which the plurality of hold icons are arranged changes. As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, by changing the posture of the sub display device 10, it is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the direction in which the plurality of hold icons displayed on the sub display device 10 are arranged changes. .. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(D)(E), FIG. 93(A)(B), FIG. 94(C)(D), and FIG. 95(C)(D), arrangements are made. In the direction change effect, the angles of the plurality of hold icons arranged in a line while the display is maintained change. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(G), FIG. 93(E)(F), FIG. 94(G)(H), and FIG. 95(G)(H), array direction change effect. Then, the plurality of hold icons move in the direction intersecting with the line direction after the line angles change. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92(B)(G), FIG. 93(C)(D)(G), FIG. 94(B)(G), and FIG. 95(B)(G). In the array direction change effect, the plurality of holding icons move in the direction intersecting with the direction in which the icons are lined up while maintaining the display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92D and FIG. 93B, one of a plurality of holding icons is displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 in the arrangement direction change effect. By changing the display position of the hold icon, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons are displayed on the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10 changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sub display device 10 is configured to be rotatable, as shown in FIGS. 93(H), 94(C)(F), and 95(C)(F). In the arrangement direction change effect, the arrangement direction of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the sub display device 10 changes as the sub display device 10 rotates. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the reserved array direction change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the holding arrangement direction change effects A to D, the plurality of holding icons 9A are linearly arranged. However, the plurality of hold icons 9A may be displayed side by side in a curved line. In this case, the approximate straight line of the plurality of holding icons 9A can be regarded as the arrangement direction of the plurality of holding icons 9A. Further, even when the plurality of holding icons 9A are displayed in a non-uniform manner such as zigzag, the approximate straight line can be regarded as the arrangement direction.

[Modification 2]
In the hold array direction change effects A to D, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 is illustrated, but the hold array direction change effect may be the hold icon 9B or the hold icon 9C corresponding to the special figure 2. .. Further, while both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B are displayed, the angle of one or both of these may be changed in the arrangement direction.

[Modification 3]
In the hold array direction change effects A to D, the directions of the hold icons 9A change in accordance with the change in the array direction. However, in the hold array direction change effect, only the array direction may change without changing the direction of each hold icon 9A.

[Modification 4]
In the holding arrangement direction change effects A to D, when the arrangement direction of the holding icons 9A changes, the display may be maintained in a part that is not maintained, or a part that is not maintained is displayed. The display may be maintained.

[Modification 5]
In the hold arrangement direction change effects A to D, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. Further, the hold icon 9A may change the arrangement direction while straddling the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the holding array direction change effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Further, the holding array direction change effects A to D may not include a part of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode B1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
It is possible to execute an arrangement direction change effect in which the direction in which the plurality of the hold icons displayed on the display unit are arranged changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the array direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons, the angle of the direction aligned while maintaining the display changes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
In the array direction change effect, the plurality of holding icons move in a direction intersecting with the arranging direction after the arranging angle changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
In the array direction change effect, the plurality of hold icons move in a direction intersecting with a direction in which the display is maintained,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
In the arrangement direction change effect, in the display means, a display direction of the plurality of hold icons displayed on the display means is changed by changing a display position of one or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons. Change,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
The display means is configured to be rotatable,
In the arrangement direction change effect, by rotating the display means, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons are displayed on the display means changes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The pending display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. This hold display effect may be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R).

[Hold display effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect A. In the hold display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, three hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icons 9C are displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape imitating the appearance of the right sub display device 10R. Specifically, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape in which an inner rectangle and an outer rectangle surrounding the rectangle are combined. The inner rectangular portion is a portion imitating the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the portion between the inner rectangle and the outer rectangle is a portion imitating the outer frame of the right sub display device 10R. .. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of being lost. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 96(D) to 96(J), the rightmost hold icon of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 at which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 at which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96(D), the hold icon 9A moves from the first display position DP1 of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of arrow AD1 (obliquely to the right). Start moving in a curved line (upward). At this time, a direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and a direction in which the hold icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 (right diagonally upward direction). Are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L so that the left sub display device A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the 10L display screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A changes the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7a. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (the diagonally right downward direction). ) Begins to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R so that the main display device A part of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of No. 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 96(I), as the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the right sub display device. It is displayed at the upper left position on the 10R display screen. Along with this, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A displays the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Is moved to the second display position DP2 and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are also moved to the right side, and the holding icon 9A on the right side of the two holding icons 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, the holding digestion is performed. With the completion of this reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservations is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Hold display effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect B. In the hold display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape imitating the appearance of the right sub display device 10R. Specifically, it has a rectangular outer shape similar to that of the right sub display device 10R. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of being lost. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 97(D) to 97(J), the rightmost hold icon among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 at which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 at which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the hold icon 9A moves from the first display position DP1 of the left sub display device 10L toward the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of arrow AD1 (obliquely to the right). Start moving in a curved line (upward). At this time, a direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and a direction in which the hold icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 (right diagonally upward direction). Are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1, and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L so that the left sub display device A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the 10L display screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A changes the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7a. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (the diagonally right downward direction). ) Begins to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R so that the main display device A part of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of No. 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 97(I), as the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the right sub display device. It is displayed at the upper left position on the 10R display screen. Along with this, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A displays the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Is moved to the second display position DP2 and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are also moved to the right side, and the holding icon 9A on the right side of the two holding icons 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, the holding digestion is performed. With the completion of this reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservations is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Hold display effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect C. In the hold display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). The right sub display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub display device 10R includes an annular portion R1 that forms an outer peripheral portion of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub display device 10R includes a circular display screen inside the annular portion R1. The right sub display device 10R is configured to be vertically movable between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position located above the retracted position. The annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable clockwise (clockwise) and counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 98(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. .. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. In the upper area of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a hold icon 9A representing the first special figure reservation is displayed, and in the lower area a hold icon 9B representing the second special figure reservation (not shown) is displayed. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub display device 10R represents the holding icon 9C as a whole of the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, an image representing the color, pattern, etc. of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape imitating the appearance of the right sub display device 10R. Specifically, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape in which an inner circle and an outer circle surrounding the circle are combined. The inner circular portion is a portion simulating the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the portion between the inner circle and the outer circle is an annular portion R1 which is an outer frame of the right sub display device 10R. It is a part that imitates. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of being lost. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 98(D) to 98(I), the rightmost hold icon among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 at which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 at which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving. The right sub display device 10R represents the holding icon 9C as a whole of the right sub display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the entire right sub display device 10R becomes the second display position DP2. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(D), the hold icon 9A moves from the first display position DP1 of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of the arrow AD1 (obliquely to the right). Start moving in a curved line (upward). At this time, a direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and a direction in which the hold icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 (right diagonally upward direction). Are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and the hold icon 9A jumps outward from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, so that the left sub display device A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the 10L display screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A changes the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7a. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of the arrow AD2 (the diagonally right downward direction). ) Begins to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 so that the hold icon 9A jumps into the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the screen 7a. Along with this, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(I), the hold icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are also moved to the right side, and the holding icon 9A on the right side of the two holding icons 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, the holding digestion is performed. With the completion of this reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservations is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Hold display effect D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the hold display effect D. In the hold display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). The right sub display device 10R has a circular shape. The right sub display device 10R includes an annular portion R1 that forms an outer peripheral portion of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub display device 10R includes a circular display screen inside the annular portion R1. The right sub display device 10R is configured to be vertically movable between a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position located above the retracted position. The annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable in the circumferential direction. That is, the annular portion R1 is configured to be rotatable clockwise (clockwise) and counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

Then, as shown in FIG. 99(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. .. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. In the upper area of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, a hold icon 9A representing the first special figure reservation is displayed, and in the lower area a hold icon 9B representing the second special figure reservation (not shown) is displayed. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The right sub display device 10R represents the holding icon 9C as a whole of the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, an image representing the color, pattern, etc. of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a shape imitating the appearance of the right sub display device 10R. Specifically, the right sub-display device 10R has a shape in which an inner circle and an outer circle surrounding the circle are combined. The inner circular part is a part simulating the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the part between the inner circle and the outer circle is the annular part which is the outer frame of the right sub display device 10R. This is a simulated part. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of losing. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. The rightmost hold icon 9A of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is the rightmost hold icon on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The first display position DP1 displaying 9A is moved to the second display position DP2 displaying the hold icon 9C on the right sub display device 10R. The right sub display device 10R represents the holding icon 9C as a whole of the right sub display device 10R. Therefore, the position of the entire right sub display device 10R becomes the second display position DP2. Further, a part of the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), the entire right sub display device 10R is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Then, the next variable display is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), the right sub display device 10R moves upward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position (deployed position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the right sub display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), the annular portion R1 of the right sub display device 10R rotates clockwise (clockwise) along the circumferential direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(H), after stopping the rotation of the annular portion R1 of the right sub display device 10R, the right sub display device 10R moves upward again from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position. Moving. Next, as shown in FIG. 99(I), the right sub display device 10R moves downward from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position). Next, as shown in FIG. 99(J), the annular portion R1 of the right sub display device 10R rotates counterclockwise along the circumferential direction.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the left sub display device 10L that displays the hold icon 9A, and the right sub that is configured to be movable and represents the hold (the hold icon 9C). And a display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the right sub display device 10R represents the state of the hold (the hold icon 9C) including the presence or absence of the hold (the hold icon 9C). .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the right sub display device 10R has a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the hold icon 9A has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the right sub display device 10R has a circular shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, the right sub display device 10R constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the right sub display device 10R and includes an annular portion R1 rotatable in the circumferential direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of hold display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hold display effects of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C) has been described as having a display screen. That is, the right sub display device 10R uses the display screen to represent the hold (the hold icon 9C). However, the right sub display device 10R may be in a mode that does not have a display screen (does not use the display screen). For example, instead of the display screen, a light emitting device or the like that emits light so as to represent the reserved color may be used.
[Modification 2]
In the hold display effects of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C) has been described as having a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C). However, the right sub display device 10R may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C). For example, the shape of the right sub display device 10R and the shape of the hold (the hold icon 9C) may be completely different.
[Modification 3]
In the hold display effects of FIGS. 96 to 98, it is assumed that the hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L has a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C). explained. However, the hold icon 9A may not have a shape corresponding to the shape of the right sub display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C). For example, the shape of the hold icon 9A and the shape of the right sub display device 10R may be completely different.
[Modification 4]
In the hold display effects of FIGS. 96 to 98, the right sub display device 10R representing the hold (the hold icon 9C) has been described as having a rectangular shape or a circular shape. However, the right sub display device 10R is not limited to such a shape. The right sub display device 10R may have, for example, an elliptical shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, or another polygonal shape.
[Modification 5]
In the hold display effect of FIGS. 96 to 98, decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device. It is displayed on 10L. For example, the decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) and the hold icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
Display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
A gaming machine that is configured to be movable and that includes a movable accessory representing the holding,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The movable accessory represents the state of the hold including the presence or absence of the hold,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
The movable accessory has a shape corresponding to the reserved shape.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-3,
The hold icon has a shape corresponding to the shape of the movable accessory,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-3 or aspect B2-4,
The movable accessory has a circular shape,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B2-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The movable accessory constitutes an outer peripheral portion of the movable accessory, and includes an annular portion rotatable in the circumferential direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The holding movement effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This hold movement effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is read. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R).

[Holding move effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the hold movement effect A. In the hold movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a circular shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of being lost. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 100(D) to 100(J), the rightmost hold icon among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 at which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 at which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100(D), the hold icon 9A moves from the first display position DP1 of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of the arrow AD1 (obliquely to the right). Start moving in a curved line (upward). At this time, a direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and a direction in which the hold icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 (right diagonally upward direction). Are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and the hold icon 9A jumps outward from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L so that the left sub display device 10A is moved outward. A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the 10L display screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A changes the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7a. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of arrow AD2 (the diagonally right downward direction). ) Begins to move in a curved line. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, so that the main display device A part of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of No. 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 100(I), as the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the entire hold icon 9A is the right sub display device. It is displayed at the upper left position on the 10R display screen. Along with this, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A displays the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. To the second display position DP2, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are also moved to the right side, and the holding icon 9A on the right side of the two holding icons 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, the holding digestion is performed. With the completion of this reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservations is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Holding move effect B]
101: is a figure for demonstrating holding movement production B. In the hold movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 101A, the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a circular shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of being lost. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 101D to 101J, the rightmost hold icon of the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 at which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 at which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101D, the hold icon 9A moves from the first display position DP1 of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of arrow AD1 (obliquely to the right). Start moving in a straight line (upward). At this time, a direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and a direction in which the hold icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 (right diagonally upward direction). Are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the first display position DP1, and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L so that the left sub display device A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the 10L display screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed on the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Displayed on the screen 7a. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A changes the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7a. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the second display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R in the direction of arrow AD2 (the diagonally right downward direction). ) Begins to move in a straight line. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), the hold icon 9A starts moving from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R so that the main display device A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the display screen 7a of No. 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 101(I), as the hold icon 9A jumps from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the entire hold icon 9A is the right sub display device. It is displayed at the upper left position on the 10R display screen. Along with this, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A displays the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(J), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Is moved to the second display position DP2 and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are also moved to the right side, and the holding icon 9A on the right side of the two holding icons 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, the holding digestion is performed. With the completion of this reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservations is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Hold movement effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the holding movement effect C. In the hold movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a circular shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of being lost. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 102(D) to 102(I), the rightmost hold icon among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 at which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 at which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the hold icon 9A moves from the first display position DP1 of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the direction of arrow AD1 (obliquely to the right). Start moving in a curved line (upward). At this time, a direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction) and a direction in which the hold icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 (right diagonally upward direction). Are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and the hold icon 9A jumps outward from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L so that the left sub display device 10L is displayed. A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the 10L display screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the hold icon 9A is displayed from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L as if the hold icon 9A jumped out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and disappeared. Turn it off. In addition to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the hold icon 9A once disappeared is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 as if the hold icon 9A jumped into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R from above. A part (holding icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), as the hold icon 9A jumps into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the entire hold icon 9A is at the upper left position of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Is displayed. Along with this, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(I), the hold icon 9A moves from the upper left of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R toward the second display position DP2, and finally the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. To the second display position DP2, and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are also moved to the right side, and the holding icon 9A on the right side of the two holding icons 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, the holding digestion is performed. With the completion of this reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservations is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Holding move effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the holding movement effect D. In the hold movement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a circular shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of being out of alignment. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIGS. 103(D) to 103(H), the rightmost hold icon among the three hold icons 9A displayed side by side in the left-right direction on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. From the first display position DP1 at which 9A displays the rightmost hold icon 9A on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the second display position DP2 at which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Moving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the hold icon 9A is in the direction of arrow AD1 from the first display position DP1 of the left sub display device 10L to the first display position DP2 of the right sub display device 10R. Begins to move linearly (downward to the right). At this time, a direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are arranged (horizontal direction), and a direction in which the hold icons 9A start to move from the first display position DP1 (diagonal right downward direction). Are in different directions. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), the hold icon 9A starts to move from the first display position DP1, and the hold icon 9A pops out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the outside of the left sub display device. A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed on the 10L display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), the hold icon 9A appears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R as if it has jumped from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. A part of the hold icon 9A (a hold icon 9A with a part missing) is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the entire hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, as if the hold icon 9A jumped into the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Along with this, the two hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L also move to the right. While the hold icon 9A moves from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A displays the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. It may be displayed across and.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), the hold icon 9A moves to the second display position DP2 on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the two holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are also moved to the right side, and the holding icon 9A on the right side of the two holding icons 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is displayed at the first display position DP1. In this way, the holding digestion is performed. With the completion of this reservation, the number of special figure 1 reservations is reduced by 1 to 2. That is, it matches the number (two) of the hold icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L after the hold is consumed.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of holding movement production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first display position DP1 on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the first effect. After the presentation, the hold icon 9A is moved from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2 where the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. It is possible to execute the second effect that is displayed so as to be displayed, and the third effect in which the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R after the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is displayed so as to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the hold icon 9A is displayed in the order of the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 in the second effect. It According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen of the main display device 7 are displayed. The hold icon 9A is displayed using 7a so as to move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A has the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the right sub display. They are displayed in order of the display screen of the device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, a direction in which a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L and a hold icon 9A in the second effect. The direction in which the movement starts from the first display position DP1 is a different direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, in the second effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed so as to move in a curved shape from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. It According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a reservation movement production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hold movement effects A, B, and D of FIGS. 100, 101, and 103, the hold icon 9A is displayed so as to be continuously moved from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. However, the hold icon 9A may be displayed so as to intermittently move from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2.
[Modification 2]
In the hold movement effects A, B, and D of FIGS. 100, 101, and 103, the hold icon 9A is displayed so as to move linearly or curvedly from the first display position DP1 to the second display position DP2. did. However, the method of moving the hold icon 9A is not limited to these.
[Modification 3]
In the hold movement effect of FIGS. 100 to 103, decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device. It is displayed on 10L. For example, the decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) and the hold icon 9A may be displayed on the same display device (display means).
[Modification 4]
In the holding movement effect of FIGS. 100 to 103, the holding icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 and the direction (horizontal direction) in which the plurality of holding icons 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L are arranged. It is a direction different from the direction (direction of arrow AD1). However, the direction in which the plurality of hold icons 9A are arranged (horizontal direction) and the direction in which the hold icons 9A start moving from the first display position DP1 may be the same direction (for example, horizontal direction).

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means for displaying the hold, and
A first effect in which a hold icon is displayed at a first position on the first display means;
After the first effect, using the first display means, the hold icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to a second position where the hold is displayed on the second display means. The second effect that is
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the hold is displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
Further comprising a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move from the first position to the second position by using the first display unit and the third display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed in the order of the first display means and the third display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
Further comprising a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
In the second effect, the hold icon is moved from the first position to the second position by using the first display unit, the second display unit, and the third display unit. Displayed in
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed in the order of the first display means, the third display means, and the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5,
A direction in which the plurality of the hold icons displayed on the first display unit are lined up and a direction in which the hold icons in the second effect start moving from the first position are different directions.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-6,
In the second effect, the hold icon is displayed so as to move in a curved shape from the first position to the second position,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The information display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. The information display effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the information display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[The relevant information display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has been changed to the reserved color red. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (miss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are "5", and the middle effect design 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next variation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area becomes the reserved image 9C, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the first storage area. The corresponding reserved image 9A becomes, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the held image 9C that has been changed to be held red is displayed. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins here, the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases. In the battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the feet of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the suspension image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[The relevant information display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has been changed to the reserved color red. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the jackpot expectation information corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed. Here, a message image MSG of "so-so" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (miss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are "5", and the middle effect design 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next variation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as indicated by the arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area moves to the right sub display device 10R, and the message image MSG of "Gekiatsu" is displayed. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), the variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, "Gekiatsu" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins here, the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases. In the battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the feet of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Further, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the display on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[The relevant information display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). In particular, the right sub display device 10R is a circular display device that imitates a reserved image. As a result, the right sub display device 10R indicates the suspension as a whole. The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has been changed to the reserved color red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106C, the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (miss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are "5", and the middle effect design 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next variation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area moves to the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R becomes red. At this time, an effect as if the reserved image 9A (red) on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R is displayed using the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 located on the back side. To be executed. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub display device 10R showing the hold is in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins here, the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases. In this battle effect, the image of the part covered by the left sub display device 10L among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the foot portion of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. In addition, the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears in red as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

[The information display effect D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the information display effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). In particular, the right sub display device 10R is a circular display device that imitates a reserved image. As a result, the right sub display device 10R indicates the suspension as a whole. The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. It is assumed that the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area has been changed to the reserved color red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In this fixed stop effect (miss), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped and displayed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are "5", and the middle effect design 8C is "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), the hold shift effect is executed. The hold shift effect is an effect that is performed almost simultaneously with the next variation start effect, and is an effect that shifts the hold image 9A. Specifically, as indicated by an arrow in the figure, the reserved image 9A (red) corresponding to the first storage area moves to the right sub display device 10R, and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R becomes red. At this time, an effect as if the reserved image 9A (red) on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L has moved to the right sub display device 10R is displayed using the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 located on the back side. To be executed. Further, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area, and the reserved image 9A corresponding to the third storage area becomes the reserved image 9A corresponding to the second storage area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), the variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Two reserved images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas are displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. On the other hand, the display screen of the right sub display device 10R showing the hold is in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a battle/information addition effect is executed. This battle/information addition effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins here, the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases. Further, the battle/information addition effect is an effect for adding information regarding the fluctuation. Here, a triangular symbol is added to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, which suggests that it is even hotter than only red. The image of the portion covered by the left sub display device 10L among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, the foot portion of the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. In addition, the display screen of the right sub display device 10R disappears in red as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of the said information display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the right sub display device 10R different from the main display device 7 is used to display information related to the change (FIGS. 104(A)(B)(D)(E)(F). ), FIG. 105(A)(B)(D)(E)(F), FIG. 106(A)(B)(D)(E)(F)(G), FIG. 107(A)(B)( D)(E)(F)(G)). According to this configuration, the information related to the change can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right sub display device 10R has a shape imitating a hold image and shows the hold (FIGS. 106 and 107). According to this configuration, the information related to the change can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, information indicating the degree of expectation for a jackpot is displayed using the display screen of the right sub display device 10R (FIGS. 104(A)(B)(D)(E)(F), 105(A)(B)(D)(E)(F), FIG. 106(A)(B)(D)(E)(F)(G), FIG. 107(A)(B)(D) (E)(F)(G)). According to this configuration, the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the variation can be easily understood, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold image 9A is displayed using the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. With this configuration, the hold information can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the holding shift effect is executed, and the holding image corresponding to the first storage area of the left sub display device 10L is moved to the right sub display device 10R (FIG. 104). (D), FIG. 105(D), FIG. 106(D), and FIG. 107(D) With this configuration, the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R corresponds to the fluctuation. This makes it easier to understand and improves the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is used to perform an effect as if the reserved image corresponding to the first storage area of the left sub display device 10L moved to the right sub display device 10R. (FIG. 106(D), FIG. 107(D)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the information displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R corresponds to the variation, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the said information display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the right sub display device 10R suggests the information of the variation, but the left sub display device 10L may suggest the information of the variation.
[Modification 2]
Although the above description has been made assuming that the held image is red, various colors can be considered for the held image, such as blue, green, purple, and gold.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A first display device capable of displaying an image and performing an effect;
A game machine having a second display device different from the first display device,
A gaming machine characterized by using the second display device, and comprising effect control means for displaying information relating to the current fluctuation.

[Aspect B4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The game machine characterized in that the second display device has a shape imitating a reserved image.

[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
The game machine characterized in that the information relating to the fluctuation is information indicating a degree of expectation for a jackpot.

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
The effect control means is capable of displaying a hold image corresponding to a hold storage on the first display device.

[Aspect B4-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
The effect control unit moves the reserved image in the first display device as if the reserved image corresponding to the next change is moved to the second display device by shifting the reserved image in the first display device as the reserved storage is exhausted. A gaming machine characterized by performing performances.

[Aspect B4-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect B4-5,
The game machine is characterized in that the movement effect is performed by using a third display device located on the back side of the first display device and the second display device.

[Aspect B4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-6,
A game machine characterized by displaying the reserved image on a display screen of a display device other than the first display device when the reserved image is not displayed on the first display device.

The hold icon linked effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. This hold icon interlocking effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon linked effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon interlocking effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R). Change the position and tilt of.

[Holding icon interlocking effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon linked effect A. In the hold icon interlocking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub display device 10L, four reservation icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves and the like in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, the third hold from the right of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 108A will be described as a specific hold icon. In addition, here, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is called a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 108(B), the hold icon 9A of the third hold from the right of the four hold icons 9A changes to hold by prefetching. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to be overlapped with the round image holding icon 9A. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing “heat”. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 108(C), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is held by the hold digestion. The shift movement of the icon 9A is performed. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right, and after frame-out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the right It is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. That is, in this embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The specific image TG moves (interlockingly) with the shift movement of the holding icon 9A (specific holding icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously overlapped with the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) and displayed. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the second hold by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 108(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger “heat” character or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern is variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(E), when the decorative design is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) holds and reserves it. The hold icon 9A is moved again by the shift. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right, and after frame-out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the right It is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved to the right, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The specific image TG moves (interlockingly) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. The specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the first hold by the shift movement.

Thereafter, the decorative pattern is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 108(F) and 108(G), the sub display device 10 (left sub display device) is displayed. 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the shift movement of the hold icon 9A due to the hold exhaustion is performed again. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) specific hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the right to be held, and the left sub display device 10L displays After frame-out from the screen, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the specific suspension icon 9A is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved rightward, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is framed out (after disappearing) from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L in accordance with the movement of the specific suspension icon 9A, and then displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Is displayed). On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the specific image TG is framed in from the left side of the display screen, moved rightward, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific suspension icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific suspension icon (always located below the specific suspension icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 108(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific suspension icon 9A is displayed. In the left sub display device 10L, the number of reservations is 1 due to the reservation being exhausted, and one reservation icon 9A is displayed. From the right side of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the specific image TG represented as "heat" is framed in and moves leftward. That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the right side of the display screen of the right sub-display device 10R where the specific hold icon 9A is framed out once. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(I), the specific image TG stops near the center of the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is displayed in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are "3" and are temporarily stopped. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the jackpot is highly expected in the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 108(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit.

[Holding icon interlocking production B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon linked effect B. In the hold icon linked effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub display device 10L, four reservation icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves and the like in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, the third hold from the right of the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 109A will be described as a specific hold icon. In addition, here, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is called a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. As shown in FIG. 109(B), the hold icon 9A of the third hold from the right of the four hold icons 9A changes to hold by prefetching. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to be overlapped with the round image holding icon 9A. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing “heat”. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 109(C), when the decorative design is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 display the hold icon by the hold exhaustion. 9A shift movement is performed. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after frame-out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved to the upper right direction, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The specific image TG moves (interlockingly) with the shift movement of the holding icon 9A (specific holding icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously overlapped with the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) and displayed. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the second hold by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 109(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger “heat” character or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern is variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 109(E), when the decorative design is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subject to the pending digestion. The shift icon 9A is shifted again. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after frame-out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved to the upper right direction, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The specific image TG moves (interlockingly) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative pattern is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 109(F) and 109(G), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device) is displayed. 10) and the main display device 7 again shifts the hold icon 9A due to the hold consumption. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) specific hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves in the upper right direction to become the hold, and the display on the left sub display device 10L is displayed. After being framed out of the screen, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific hold icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved to the upper right direction, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after being framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L according to the movement of the specific suspension icon 9A. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moved to the upper right direction, and then framed out from the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific suspension icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific suspension icon 9A (always located below the specific suspension icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 109(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific suspension icon 9A is displayed. In the left sub display device 10L, the number of reservations is 1 due to the reservation being exhausted, and one reservation icon 9A is displayed. From the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG represented by "heat" is framed in and moves leftward. That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the right side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 where the specific hold icon 9A is framed out once. Then, as shown in FIG. 109(I), the specific image TG stops near the right end of the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is displayed in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are "3" and are temporarily stopped. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the jackpot is highly expected in the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit mode.

[Holding icon interlocking effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon linked effect C. In the hold icon linked effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub display device 10L, four reservation icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves and the like in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A of FIG. 110(A), the third hold from the right is described as the specific hold icon. In addition, here, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is called a specific hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9A of the third hold from the right of the four hold icons 9A changes to hold by prefetching. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to be overlapped with the round image holding icon 9A. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing “heat”. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 110(B), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 hold the icon due to the hold exhaustion. 9A shift movement is performed. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after frame-out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and then draws a parabolic trajectory, as shown in FIG. It moves to the lower right direction, and above the right sub display device 10R, the frame is displayed from the lower side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The specific image TG moves (interlockingly) with the shift movement of the holding icon 9A (specific holding icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously overlapped with the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) and displayed. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the second hold by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 110(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger “heat” character or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern is variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(E), when the decorative design is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subject to the pending digestion. The shift icon 9A is shifted again. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after frame-out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the main It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in a lower parabolic trajectory, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, the frame is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. That is, in this embodiment, the hold icon is not displayed. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The specific image TG moves (interlockingly) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative design is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative design is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device) is displayed as shown in FIGS. 110(F) and 110(G). 10) and the main display device 7 again shifts the hold icon 9A due to the hold consumption. Specifically, the first hold (rightmost) specific hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves in the upper right direction to become the hold, and the display on the left sub display device 10L is displayed. After being framed out of the screen, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific holding icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then draws a parabolic trajectory and moves in the lower right direction, and the right sub display. Above the device 10R, the frame is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image TG moves (in conjunction) with the movement of the specific hold icon 9A. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after being framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L according to the movement of the specific suspension icon 9A. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in a lower parabolic trajectory, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, frame out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific suspension icon 9A does not change during the movement of the specific suspension icon 9A (always located below the specific suspension icon 9A).

As shown in FIG. 110(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific suspension icon 9A is displayed. In the left sub display device 10L, the number of reservations is 1 due to the reservation being exhausted, and one reservation icon 9A is displayed. From the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG represented by "heat" is framed in and moves upward. That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 where the specific hold icon 9A is framed out once. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(I), the specific image TG stops near the lower right corner of the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is displayed in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are "3" and are temporarily stopped. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the jackpot is highly expected in the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 110(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit.

[Holding icon linked effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon linked effect D. In the hold icon interlocking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 111(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are variably displayed. On the left sub display device 10L, four reservation icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the hold icon interlocking effect in which the specific image displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, moves and the like in conjunction with the specific hold icon will be described. In this embodiment, of the four hold icons 9A of FIG. 110(A), the third hold from the right is described as the specific hold icon. In addition, here, of the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon that has undergone a predetermined hold change is called a specific hold icon. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

As shown in FIG. 111A, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) linearly in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9A of the third hold from the right of the four hold icons 9A changes to hold by prefetching. Here, the specific image TG is displayed so as to be overlapped with the round image holding icon 9A. The specific image TG represents the appearance of a specific target. Here, the specific image TG is a character image representing “heat”. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist.

As shown in FIG. 111(B), when the decorative design is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 hold the icon due to the hold exhaustion. 9A shift movement is performed. Specifically, the hold icon 9C on the right sub display device 10R disappears. The first hold (rightmost) hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after frame-out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the display of the main display device 7 is displayed. Displayed on the screen 7a. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves to the upper right direction, and then draws a parabolic trajectory, as shown in FIG. It moves in the lower right direction, and is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a above the right sub display device 10R. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen and moved downward, and then stopped at a predetermined position as shown in FIG. It becomes the icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The specific image TG moves (interlockingly) with the shift movement of the holding icon 9A (specific holding icon 9A) on which the specific image TG overlaps. Therefore, the specific image TG is continuously overlapped with the same hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A) and displayed. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the second hold by the shift movement.

As shown in FIG. 111(D), the specific image TG moves downward and is displayed at a close position below the overlapping hold icon 9A (specific hold icon 9A). At this time, the specific image TG may have a larger “heat” character or a different shape. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative pattern is variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(E), when the decorative design is stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the sub display device 10 (left sub display device 10) and the main display device 7 are subject to the pending digestion. The shift icon 9A is shifted again. Specifically, the hold icon 9C on the right sub display device 10R disappears. The first hold (rightmost) hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L moves to the upper right direction, and after frame-out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the display of the main display device 7 is displayed. Displayed on the screen 7a. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the hold icon is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then moves in a lower parabolic trajectory, and moves in the lower right direction. Above 10R, the frame is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, and then stops at a predetermined position to become the hold icon 9C. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The specific image TG moves (interlockingly) with the shift movement of the upper specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A does not change before and after the shift movement. This specific hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9A for the first hold by the shift movement.

After that, the decorative design is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and when the decorative design is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device) is displayed as shown in FIGS. 110(F) and 110(G). 10) and the main display device 7 again shifts the hold icon 9A due to the hold consumption. Specifically, the hold icon 9C on the right sub display device 10R disappears. The first hold (rightmost) specific hold icon 9A displayed on the left sub display device 10L is moved to the upper right direction because of the hold, and is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. After that, it is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific holding icon 9A is framed in from the lower center of the display screen 7a, moves in the upper right direction, then draws a parabolic trajectory and moves in the lower right direction, and the right sub display. Above the device 10R, the frame is framed out from the lower side of the display screen 7a. Then, it is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is framed in from the upper side of the display screen, moves downward, and then stops at a predetermined position to become the hold icon 9C. At this time, the specific image TG is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 after the specific hold icon 9A is framed out from the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. That is, the positional relationship between the specific image TG and the specific hold icon 9A is not linked on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

As shown in FIG. 111(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a variable display corresponding to the specific suspension icon 9A is displayed. In the left sub display device 10L, the number of reservations is 1 due to the reservation being exhausted, and one reservation icon 9A is displayed. From the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the specific image TG represented by "heat" is framed in and moves upward. That is, the specific image TG is framed in again from the lower side of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 where the specific hold icon 9A is framed out once. Then, as shown in FIG. 111(I), the specific image TG stops near the lower right corner of the display screen 7 a of the main display device 7. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a reach is displayed in which the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are "3" and are temporarily stopped. That is, the display of the specific image TG suggests that the jackpot is highly expected in the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. After that, as shown in FIG. 111(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon linked effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device 10L and the hold icon displayed on the left sub display device 10L. A second effect in which the specific image TG is displayed for the specific hold icon that is one of the hold icons, and the specific image TG is displayed on the right sub display device 10R after the specific hold icon disappears from the left sub display device 10L. And a third effect in which is displayed can be executed. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is displayed on the left sub display device 10L and the left sub display device 10L. The second effect in which the specific image TG is displayed for the specific hold icon, which is one of the hold icons displayed in, and the main hold after the specific hold icon disappears from the left sub display device 10L. The third effect of displaying the specific image TG on the display device 7 can be executed. According to these configurations, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, in the second effect, after the specific image TG is displayed on the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon is interlocked with the movement. And the specific image TG moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, in the second effect, after the specific image TG is displayed overlapping the specific hold icon 9A, the display position of the specific image TG is changed. It changes and is displayed at a position close to the specific hold icon. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, in the third effect, after the specific hold icon 9A disappears from the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9A appears on the right sub display device 10R. After being displayed and disappearing from the right sub display device 10R, the specific image TG is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109, 110, and 111, in the third effect, after the specific hold icon 9A disappears from the left sub display device 10L, the main display device is displayed. The specific hold icon 9A is displayed on 7, and after disappearing from the main display device 7, the specific image TG is displayed on the main display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 108, in the third effect, when the specific hold icon 9A is held, the left sub display device 10L moves to the right sub display device 10R. , After moving to the right sub-display device 10R, it disappears from the right sub-display device 10R by moving toward the outside of the right sub-display device 10R, and from the position in the right sub-display device 10R where the specific hold icon 9A disappears. The specific image TG appears. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 109, FIG. 110, and FIG. 111, in the third effect, when the specific hold icon 9A is put on hold, the main display is performed from the left sub display device 10L. After moving to the device 7 and then to the main display device 7, the main display device 7 disappears by moving toward the outside of the main display device 7, and the position where the specific hold icon 9A of the main display device 7 disappears The specific image TG appears from. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the specific image TG suggests information related to the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the hold icon linked effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon linked effects A to D, the specific image TG is assumed to represent “heat”. However, the specific image TG may be a character image other than “heat”. For example, the specific image TG may be "No way", "Chance", "Extreme heat", or the like. Then, the expectation of the winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon may be changed depending on the content of the character. That is, a difference in the degree of expectation may be suggested depending on the content of the character.

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon linked effects A to D, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the special figure 1 is illustrated, but the hold icon linked effect may be the hold icon 9B corresponding to the special figure 2. Further, both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B may perform the effect.

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon linked effects A to D, the direction of the hold icon 9A does not change during movement. However, in the hold icon interlocking effect, the hold icon 9A may change its direction during movement. For example, the hold icon 9A may move while rotating. In addition, the hold icon 9A may change in size during the movement or may blink.

[Modification 4]
In the hold icon interlocking effects A to D, when the hold icon 9A moves, the display may not be maintained in the part that maintains the display, and the display may be maintained in the part that does not maintain the display. May be.

[Modification 5]
In the hold icon linked effects A to D, the hold icon 9A may be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. The specific image TG may also be displayed across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the hold icon linked effects A to D may be appropriately combined. In addition, the hold icon linked effects A to D may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect B5-1]
First display means capable of displaying an image,
A gaming machine comprising: a second display means capable of displaying an image,
A first effect in which a hold icon is displayed on the first display means;
A second effect in which a specific image is displayed for a specific hold icon that is one of the hold icons displayed on the first display means;
After the specific hold icon disappears from the first display unit, a third effect in which the specific image is displayed on the second display unit can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
In the second effect, after the specific image is displayed on the first display unit, the specific image moves in conjunction with the movement of the specific hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2,
In the second effect, after the specific image is displayed so as to overlap the specific hold icon, the display position of the specific image changes and is displayed at a position close to the specific hold icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
In the third effect, after the specific hold icon disappears from the first display means, the specific hold icon is displayed on the second display means, and after disappearing from the second display means, The specific image is displayed on the second display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B5-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
In the third effect, when the specific hold icon is put on hold, the second display means is moved from the first display means to the second display means, and then the second display means is moved to the second display means. Moving toward the outside of the display means, disappears from the second display means, and the specific image appears from a position of the second display means where the specific hold icon disappears,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The specific image suggests information related to the degree of expectation of winning lottery corresponding to the specific hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The pending change suggesting effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. This hold change suggestion effect may be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol (for example, during the pseudo continuous effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pending change suggestion image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image data is read. The effect is to display an image on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R).

[Hold change suggestion production A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect A. In the pending change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a circular shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9C is suspended. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 indicating the possibility of change is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a teammate character CRA, which is an image representing a teammate character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image that suggests the mode of the hold icon 9C after the hold change. In the present embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" so as to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, the teammate character CRA performs an action of throwing the ball BG to the enemy character CRB. The ball BG, which is an image representing a ball, is included in the first pending change suggestion image HG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 112D, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA against the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 that indicates the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image that indicates that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is executed. Specifically, an image showing that the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA hits the enemy character CRB and is able to damage the enemy character CRA is displayed. That is, an image showing that the predetermined effect is successful is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an operation is performed in which the enemy character CRB is damaged and regretted. Here, a character image representing a line of the enemy character CRB, "I was done!", is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(G), the enemy character CRB turns downward from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 toward the holding icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R while rotating slightly leftward. It appears to move.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(H), the enemy character CRB is displayed so as to move from the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 to the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The enemy character CRB is displayed across the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(I), the enemy character CRB collides with the hold icon 9C on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R, and the hold icon 9C changes to hold. Specifically, the hold icon 9C changes from "white" to "red" which is the color of the enemy character CRB. Next, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold change suggestion production B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect B. In the pending change suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a circular shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9C is suspended. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 indicating the possibility of change is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a teammate character CRA, which is an image representing a teammate character, and an enemy character CRB, which is an image representing an enemy character. The enemy character CRA includes an image that suggests the mode of the hold icon 9C after the hold change. In the present embodiment, the entire enemy character CRA is "red" so as to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, the teammate character CRA performs an action of throwing the ball BG to the enemy character CRB. The ball BG, which is an image representing a ball, is included in the first pending change suggestion image HG1. Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG which the teammate character CRA throws at the enemy character CRB hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 that indicates the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image that indicates that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is not executed. Specifically, the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, but an image showing that the ball BG has been repelled by the enemy character CRA is displayed. That is, an image showing that the predetermined effect has failed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, an operation is performed in which the enemy character CRB is damaged and regretted. Here, a character image representing a line of the enemy character CRB, such as "Kikanuwa!", is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold change suggestion production C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect C. In the pending change suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a circular shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9C is suspended. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 indicating the possibility of change is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a teammate character CRA, which is an image representing a teammate character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image that suggests the mode of the hold icon 9C after the hold change. In the present embodiment, the entire ball BG is “red” so as to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114C, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, the teammate character CRA performs an action of throwing a ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA flies toward the left sub display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA hits the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 that indicates the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image that indicates that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is executed. Specifically, the ball BG is the main so that the ball BG thrown by the ally character CRA jumps into the left sub display device 10L and moves toward the second holding icon 9A from the right of the three holding icons 9A. It is displayed across the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the left sub display device 10L. That is, an image showing that the predetermined effect is successful is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA collides with the second holding icon 9A from the right of the three holding icons 9A on the left sub display device 10L, and the holding thereof is held. The icon 9A changes to hold. Specifically, the hold icon 9A changes from "white" to "red" which is the same color as the ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA makes a delightful motion. In this case, a character image representing a line of the friend character CRA such as "Yatte!" is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114(I), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold change suggestion production D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the pending change suggestion effect D. In the pending change suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. At this time, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, and the hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C represent the appearance of a specific target. Here, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a circular shape that represents the appearance of a round figure. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, a state in which the number of special figure 1 reservations is 3 is illustrated. The color of the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C is "white".

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R disappears once, and the hold icon 9C is suspended. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 indicating the possibility of change is displayed. The first pending change suggestion image HG1 includes a teammate character CRA, which is an image representing a teammate character, and a ball BG, which is an image representing a ball. The ball BG includes an image that suggests the mode of the hold icon 9C after the hold change. In the present embodiment, the entire ball BG is “red” so as to suggest the color of the hold icon 9C after the hold change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the teammate character CRA performs a predetermined effect (action). Here, the teammate character CRA performs an action of throwing a ball BG. Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA flies toward the left sub display device 10L. Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA hits the left sub display device 10L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 that indicates the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon 9C is displayed. The second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image that indicates that the hold change of the hold icon 9C is not executed. Specifically, the ball BG thrown by the teammate character CRA hits the left sub display device 10L, but an image showing that the ball BG has bounced back is displayed. That is, an image showing that the predetermined effect has failed is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the ally character CRA performs an operation that makes it regrettable. In this case, a character image representing the line "Dameda!" of the ally character CRA is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), the display of the second pending change suggestion image HG2 disappears on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the pending change suggestive image effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed on the left sub display device 10L (right sub display device 10R). And, after the first display effect, a second effect in which a first hold change suggestion image HG1 that indicates a possibility of a hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed can be executed. .. And the 1st hold|maintenance change suggestion image HG1 contains the image which shows the aspect after hold|maintenance change of hold icon 9A (the said hold icon 9C) at least in part. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, after the second effect, the first hold change suggestion suggesting the possibility of a hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). It is possible to execute the third effect in which the second pending change suggestion image HG2 different from the image HG1 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 suggests, at least in part, the mode after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). Including the image to be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image that suggests that the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is executed. is there. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 114, at least a part of the second hold change suggestion image HG2 is displayed as the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) in the third effect. It is displayed so that it moves toward the position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 114, after the third effect, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 115, the second hold change suggestion image HG2 is an image that indicates that the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is not executed. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the pending change suggestion image effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, but the first hold change suggestion image HG1 is displayed, for example, on the left sub display. It may be displayed on the device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, other display devices, or the like. Moreover, you may make it display over several display devices.
[Modification 2]
In the pending change suggesting effects of FIGS. 112 to 115, an image in which a part of the first pending change suggesting image HG1 suggests the mode of the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C) after the pending change (enemy character CRB, ball BG). However, the entire first hold change suggestion image HG1 may be an image that suggests the state after the hold change of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification 3]
In the pending change suggesting effects of FIGS. 112 to 115, an image in which a part of the second pending change suggesting image HG2 suggests the mode of the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C) after the pending change (enemy character CRB, ball BG). However, the entire second hold change suggestion image HG2 may be an image that suggests the aspect of the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) after the hold change.
[Modification 4]
In the pending change suggestion effect of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first pending change suggestion image HG1 and the second pending change suggestion image HG2 are displayed continuously, but for example, the first pending change suggestion image HG1. The second pending change suggestion image HG2 may be displayed after disappearing.
[Modification 5]
In the pending change suggestion effects of FIGS. 112 to 115, the first pending change suggestive image HG1 and the second pending change suggestive image HG2 are related images. For example, the first pending change suggestive image HG1 and the second pending change suggestive image. The image may not be related to the suggestion image HG2 at all.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
A first effect in which a hold icon is displayed on the display means;
After the first display effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a first hold change suggestion image indicating a possibility of a hold change of the hold icon is displayed.
The first hold change suggestion image includes, at least in part, an image suggesting an aspect after the hold change of the hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which a second hold change suggestion image different from the first hold change suggestion image indicating the possibility of the hold change of the hold icon is displayed. Is
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-2,
The second hold change suggestion image includes, at least in part, an image that suggests a state after the hold change of the hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or aspect B6-3,
The second hold change suggestion image is an image that suggests that the hold change of the hold icon is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-4,
In the third effect, at least a part of the second hold change suggestion image is displayed so as to move toward the position where the hold icon is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-4 or aspect B6-5,
After the third effect, it is possible to execute a fourth effect that changes the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect B6-7]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-2 or aspect B6-3,
The second hold change suggestion image is an image that indicates that the hold change of the hold icon is not executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol display mode effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. This decorative symbol display mode effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol, during a big hit game, or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pending change suggestion image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image data is read. The effect is to display an image on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern display mode production A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect A. In the decorative symbol display mode effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116(A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times of variation of the decorative symbol (number of times of variation) during this jackpot game is the 99th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of being lost. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. As a result, the 99th decorative symbol variation effect in the jackpot game is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. R. The number of times of changing the decorative pattern during this jackpot game (the number of changes) is the 100th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of losing. As a result, the 100th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed. That is, the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. And disappears once. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(F), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(G), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position (expanded position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at the advanced position and stops in a state of being inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(I), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed again, and the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative. A decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. The number of times of changing the decorative pattern during this jackpot game (the number of changes) is the 101st time. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side below the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being inclined at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of being lost. As a result, the 101st decorative symbol variation effect in the jackpot game is completed. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side below the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being inclined at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern display mode production B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect B. In the decorative symbol display mode effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. The number of times of variation of the decorative symbol (number of times of variation) during this jackpot game is the 99th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of losing. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. As a result, the 99th decorative symbol variation effect in the jackpot game is completed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. It The number of times of changing the decorative pattern during this jackpot game (the number of changes) is the 100th time. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in a manner of losing. As a result, the 100th decorative symbol variation effect during the jackpot game is completed. That is, the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(E), when the number of fluctuations during the jackpot game reaches 100 times, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. And disappears once. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(F), the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(G), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position (expanded position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 117(H), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at the advanced position and stops in a state of being inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(I), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed again, and the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative. A decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is executed by the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. The number of times of changing the decorative pattern during this jackpot game (the number of changes) is the 101st time. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side below the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a horizontal state. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of being lost. As a result, the 101st decorative symbol variation effect in the jackpot game is completed. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side below the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a horizontal state. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern display mode production C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect C. In the decorative symbol display mode effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 118(A), the second movable accessory 15 is located at the retracted position (home position). Although not shown in FIG. 118(A), the first movable accessory 14 (the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R) is also in the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along the horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number (here, "7") to form a reach. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, at a timing immediately before the changing middle decoration pattern 8C stops, the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration The display of the symbol 8R disappears once, and the button image BTN and the operation promotion image SSG are displayed. The operation promotion image SSG is a character image of “press” and prompts the player to perform an operation (press operation).

Next, when the player presses the effect button 63, the left movable accessory 14L moves rightward toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, as shown in FIG. 118(D). Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves rightward toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Together with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(E), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advanced position (deployed position) to form one logo, and the display screen of the main display device 7 is displayed. Stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position (expanded position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part above the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 stand still in a state where they are partially overlapped and combined. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate counterclockwise at the advanced position and stop in a state of being inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The tilt angle at this time is the same as that of the second movable accessory 15 shown in FIGS. 116(H) and 117(H). Next, as shown in FIG. 118(G), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate right at the advanced position, return to the horizontal position, and stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(H), the left movable accessory 14L moves leftward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves rightward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(I), the left movable accessory 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the right movable accessory 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 118(J), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are the same number (here, "7"). It will definitely stop in the manner of a big hit. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed side by side along a horizontal line LN1 in the horizontal direction.

[Decorative pattern variation stop effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display mode effect D. In the decorative symbol display mode effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 during the jackpot game. The decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is executed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 116(I), the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position while being inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side below the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being inclined at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are the same number (here, "7"). It will definitely stop in the manner of a big hit. At this time, similarly to FIG. 116(J), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side below the second movable accessory 15. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side in a state of being inclined at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15 from the horizontal direction. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the display of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is unchanged, and the first movable accessory 14 and The second movable accessory 15 rotates right at the advanced position, returns to the horizontal position, and stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(D), the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(E), the left movable accessory 14L moves rightward toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves rightward toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Together with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are united at the advance position (deployed position) to form one logo, and the display screen of the main display device 7 is displayed. Stop so as to cover the vicinity of the center of 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 stops at the advanced position (expanded position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part above the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 stand still in a state where they are partially overlapped and combined. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(G), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate counterclockwise at the advanced position and stop in a state of being inclined at a predetermined angle from the horizontal direction. The tilt angle at this time is the same as that of the second movable accessory 15 shown in FIGS. 119(A) and 119(B) described above.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 rotate right at the advanced position, return to the horizontal position, and stop. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(I), the left movable accessory 14L moves leftward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Further, the right movable accessory 14R moves rightward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Along with these, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position toward the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(J), the left movable accessory 14L returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the right movable accessory 14R returns to the retracted position and stops. Further, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the retracted position and stops.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative symbol display mode effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are displayed side by side along the first direction (horizontal line L1). And a second display pattern in which the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are arranged side by side along a second direction (tilted line LN2) different from the first direction. The display mode can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first display mode is changed to the second display mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) in the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, and In the display mode of, the display elements are arranged along the second direction (tilt line LN2). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined at the advance position in the first direction (horizontal line LN1) at the time of a big hit. ), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R in the combined state rotate and are arranged along the second direction (tilt line LN2). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, when the jackpot is hit, the second movable accessory 15 runs along the same direction as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. Will be placed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative symbol display mode effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern display mode effects A to C of FIGS. 116 to 118, in the first display mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction, horizontal line L1). However, the first direction is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be any direction.
[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern display modes A, B, and D of FIGS. 116, 117, and 119, in the second display mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction). , The horizontal line LN1) is displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined by a predetermined angle, but the second direction is not limited to such a direction and is different from the first direction. It may be in any direction.
[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern display modes A, B, and D of FIGS. 116, 117, and 119, in the second display mode, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the first direction (horizontal direction). , The horizontal line LN1) is displayed side by side along an inclined line LN2 inclined at a predetermined angle, the inclination angle of the inclined line LN2 can be freely set.
[Modification 4]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects A and B of FIGS. 116 and 117, the predetermined condition for changing from the first display mode to the second display mode is that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) in the jackpot game. However, the predetermined condition is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.
[Modification 5]
In the decorative symbol display mode effects of FIGS. 116 to 119, they are arranged along the first direction (horizontal line LN1) in the first display mode, and in the second direction (tilt line LN2) in the second display mode. The movable accessory that is arranged along the second movable accessory 15 is the second movable accessory 15. However, the first movable accessory 14 (the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R) or other movable accessory Good.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A first display mode in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are displayed side by side along a first direction, and a plurality of the decorative patterns are displayed side by side along a second direction different from the first direction. A second display mode according to
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first display mode is changed to the second display mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
The predetermined condition is that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number in the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
Further comprising a first movable accessory configured to be movable,
The first movable accessory is arranged along the first direction in the first display mode, and is arranged along the second direction in the second display mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
A second movable accessory configured to be movable,
And a third movable accessory configured to be movable,
At the time of a big hit, the second movable accessory and the third movable accessory are combined at a predetermined position and arranged along the first direction, and then the second movable accessory in a combined state. The accessory and the third movable accessory rotate and are arranged along the second direction;
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-5,
At the time of the jackpot, the first movable accessory is arranged along the same direction as the second movable accessory and the third movable accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. This decorative symbol variation effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10. This decorative symbol variation effect is an effect of performing a variation effect different from the variation effect of a normal decorative pattern. In the normal decorative design variation effect, the decorative pattern varies downward.

[Decorative pattern variation production A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. In the decorative symbol variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), the effect before the decorative symbol variation start is performed. In the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(B), a left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L is an effect that moves from the variation start position to the right with the decorative symbol 8C and changes so as to hit (contact) the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative design 8C. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), a medium decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this middle decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the decorative pattern 8C moves to the right with the decorative pattern 8R from the fluctuation start position based on that the decorative pattern 8L has collided (contacted) with the decorative pattern 8C, and the decorative pattern 8R. It is a production that changes as if it hits (contacts). In this case, the decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(D), a right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8R is an effect that changes to move to the right based on that the decorative symbol 8C hits (contacts) the decorative symbol 8R. In this case, the decorative design 8R is moved to the right by a predetermined distance and then temporarily stopped at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, the left direction, which is the opposite direction to the moving direction).

Next, as shown in FIG. 120(E), a lost display effect is performed. In this lost display effect, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that are temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol variation start effect, the middle decorative symbol variation start effect, and the right decorative symbol variation start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display the stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7", are converted into "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern variation production B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. In the decorative symbol variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 121(A), an effect before the decorative symbol variation start is performed. In the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(B), left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the decorative pattern 8L moves while rotating in the right direction with the decorative pattern 8C from the fluctuation start position and changes so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8C. In this case, the decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative design 8C. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(C), a medium decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this middle decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the decorative pattern 8C moves from the fluctuation start position while rotating to the right with the decorative pattern 8R based on that the decorative pattern 8L has collided (contacted) with the decorative pattern 8C. It is an effect that changes so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped at the place after hitting the decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), a right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern variation start effect, the decorative pattern 8R is an effect that changes so as to move while rotating in the right direction based on that the decorative pattern 8C has collided with (contacted with) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative design 8R is moved to the right by a predetermined distance and then temporarily stopped at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, the left direction, which is the opposite direction to the moving direction).

Next, as shown in FIG. 121(E), a lost display effect is performed. In this lost display effect, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that are temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol variation start effect, the middle decorative symbol variation start effect, and the right decorative symbol variation start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display the stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7", are converted into "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern variation production C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. In the decorative symbol variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122(A), an effect before the decorative symbol variation start is performed. In the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(B), left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the decorative pattern 8L moves while rotating in the right direction with the decorative pattern 8C from the fluctuation start position and changes so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8C. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is displayed as an explosion image ZD1 showing a state of having exploded after colliding with the decorative pattern 8C, and the explosion is temporarily stopped at the place. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(C), middle decoration symbol variation start effect is performed. In this middle decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the decorative pattern 8C moves from the fluctuation start position while rotating to the right with the decorative pattern 8R based on that the decorative pattern 8L has collided (contacted) with the decorative pattern 8C. It is an effect that changes so as to hit (contact) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C, after colliding with the decorative pattern 8R, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, exploded, and temporarily stopped at that location.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), a right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern variation start effect, the decorative pattern 8R is an effect that changes so as to move while rotating in the right direction based on that the decorative pattern 8C has collided with (contacted with) the decorative pattern 8R. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R moves to the right for a predetermined distance, then the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and the decorative pattern 8R explodes and is temporarily stopped at that location. Instead of temporarily stopping at that location, the vehicle may move in a predetermined direction (for example, the left direction, which is the opposite direction to the moving direction).

Next, as shown in FIG. 122(E), a lost display effect is performed. In this lost display effect, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, 8R that are temporarily stopped in the left decorative symbol variation start effect, the middle decorative symbol variation start effect, and the right decorative symbol variation start effect are instantly converted to other symbols and confirmed. Display the stop. In the example of the figure, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, which were the symbols of "5 6 7", are converted into "2 3 4".

[Decorative pattern variation production D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. In the decorative symbol variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), an effect before the decorative symbol variation start is performed. In the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, in the effect before the start of the decorative symbol variation, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), left decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this left decorative symbol fluctuation start effect, the decorative symbol 8L is rotated at the fluctuation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and it is an effect representing the explosion. The hold icon 9A is reduced by one when the decorative pattern starts to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(C), a left decorative symbol sublimation effect is performed. In this left decorative pattern sublimation effect, after the decorative pattern 8L explodes, it is an effect of flying upward (moving) while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(D), a medium decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this middle decorative symbol variation start effect, the decorative symbol 8C is rotated at the variation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and it is an effect representing how the explosion occurs.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(E), a medium decorative symbol sublimation effect is performed. In this medium decorative pattern sublimation effect, after the decorative pattern 8L explodes, it is an effect of flying upward (moving) while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), a right decorative symbol variation start effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern fluctuation start effect, the decorative pattern 8R is rotated at the fluctuation start position, the explosion image ZD1 is displayed, and it is an effect representing a state of explosion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(G), right decorative pattern sublimation effect is performed. In this right decorative pattern sublimation effect, after the decorative pattern 8L explodes, it is an effect of flying upward (moving) while rotating.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(F), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C is subjected to reach display in which it changes at high speed. The reach display represents a so-called reach state. In this reach effect, the character ARA makes various effects. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the reach effect, and a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, etc. may be performed.

In the decorative symbol variation effects A to D, the same variation is performed from the left decorative symbol variation start effect to the reach effect. Note that these effects may be performed not in the same variation but in different variations. For example, the left decorative symbol fluctuation start effect, the middle decorative symbol fluctuation start effect, and the right decorative symbol fluctuation start effect may be performed with different fluctuations.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern variation effect D, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are designed to fly upward, but may fly in a direction different from the upward direction, or may fly in different directions. You can go. In addition, in the decorative pattern variation effect D, the order in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fly upward is the decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern 8C, and the decorative pattern 8R, but the order is not limited to this. The decorative pattern 8C, the decorative pattern 8R, the decorative pattern 8L, etc. may be in various orders.
In the decorative symbol variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are converted into different symbols after all three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped. Not limited, when the decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped, it may be converted into a different design before the decorative design 8C is changed, and when the decorative design 8C is provisionally stopped, a different design is changed before the decorative design 8R is changed. May be converted to.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative symbol variation effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative design variation effect, the variation of the decorative design 8C is started by moving the decorative design 8L in the direction of the decorative design 8C and hitting the decorative design 8C. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a new variation pattern of the decorative pattern, and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative design variation effect, the decorative design 8L explodes when moving in the direction of the decorative design 8C and hitting the decorative design 8C. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the variation start of the decorative symbol 8C and improve the interest of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative design variation effect, after the decorative design 8L moves in the direction of the decorative design 8C and explodes when colliding with the decorative design 8C, the decorative design 8L different from that before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the variation stop of the decorative symbol 8L and improve the interest of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative pattern change effect, the display of the decorative pattern 8R is performed before the effect that the decorative patterns 8L and 8C start changing, and the effect of the decorative pattern 8C colliding with the decorative pattern 8R is that the decorative pattern 8C starts changing. The effect that is performed after the effect that the decorative pattern 8R starts to change, is performed after the effect that the decorative pattern 8C collides with the decorative pattern 8R, and the decorative pattern 8R starts changing, in the effect that the decorative pattern 8C starts changing, the decorative pattern 8C is the decorative pattern. In the effect of hitting the 8R, the decorative pattern 8C is performed by hitting the decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the variation start of the decorative pattern 8R and improve the interest of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative pattern variation effect, in the effect that the decorative pattern 8C hits the decorative pattern 8R, the decorative pattern 8C explodes when it hits the decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the variation stop of the decorative symbol 8R and improve the interest of the variation effect of the decorative symbol, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZD-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a fifth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second decorative design,
The third display effect is an effect in which the first decorative pattern starts to change,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the first decorative design collides with the second decorative design,
The fifth display effect is an effect in which the second decorative pattern starts to change,
There may be a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and the third display effect is performed after the first display effect and the second display effect. The third display effect is performed after the third display effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed in the fifth display effect. In, variation of the second decorative pattern is started by the first decorative pattern colliding with the second decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-2]
A gaming machine described in ZD-1,
In the combination rendering, in the fourth display rendering, the first decorative design explodes when it collides with the second decorative design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-3]
A gaming machine described in ZD-2,
In the combination effect, in the fourth display effect, after the first decorative pattern has exploded, a decorative pattern different from that before the explosion is stopped at the explosion position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of ZD-1 to ZD-3,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects, and a seventh display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects.
An eighth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying a third decorative design,
The seventh display effect is an effect in which the second decorative design collides with the third decorative design,
The eighth display effect is an effect in which the third decorative pattern starts to change,
The combination effect includes the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, the sixth display effect, and the seventh display effect. May include the display effect of and the eighth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed before the third display effect and the fifth display effect, and the seventh display effect is performed after the fifth display effect. , The eighth display effect is performed after the seventh display effect, and in the eighth display effect, the second decorative pattern collides with the third decorative pattern in the seventh display effect. By this, the variation of the third decorative pattern is started,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZD-5]
A gaming machine described in ZD-4,
In the combination rendering, in the seventh display rendering, the second decorative design explodes when it collides with the third decorative design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
○ The first decorative pattern is rotated and crushed into the second decorative pattern.
○ When the direction in which the first decorative pattern collides with the second decorative pattern is the first direction, if the first decorative pattern fluctuates in a second direction different from the first direction after the explosion, A predetermined effect (reach effect) is performed. In this case, it fluctuates in a direction different from the normal fluctuation.

The pseudo continuous effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. The pseudo continuous effects A to D are examples of different configurations of the temporary stop effects in the pseudo continuous effects. This pseudo continuous production can be executed during the variation production of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pseudo continuous effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[Pseudo continuous production A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 124(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(B), a combo plunge effect is executed. In the combo plunge effect, a message image “continuous combo plunge” is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L1, "5" is stopped at the lower stage of the left effect design 8L, and "5" is stopped at the upper stage of the middle effect design 8C and the right effect design 8R.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(D), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 124(E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L2, "8" is stopped in the upper stage of the left effect design 8L and the middle effect design 8C, and "8" is stopped in the lower stage of the right effect design 8R.
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(F), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the process shifts from FIG. 124(F) to FIG. 124(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-fluctuation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. Further, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-changing effect and the changing time from the re-changing effect to the temporary stopping effect are shortened. Then, the shorter the interval time and the variation time, the higher the expectation for a big hit.

When a predetermined time elapses (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 124(G). Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 124(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the suspension image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[Pseudo continuous production B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(B), a combo plunge effect is executed. In the combo plunge effect, a message image “continuous combo plunge” is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L1, "5" is stopped at the lower stage of the left effect design 8L, and "5" is stopped at the upper stage of the middle effect design 8C and the right effect design 8R.
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(D), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped in a predetermined arrangement. Here, as shown by the line L2, the special symbol "Speed Up" is stopped on the upper stage of the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C, and the special symbol "Speed Up" is stopped on the lower stage of the right effect symbol 8R. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(F), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the process shifts from FIG. 125(F) to FIG. 125(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-fluctuation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. Further, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the change time from the re-fluctuation effect to the tentative stop effect are shortened by arranging the special symbols “Speed Up” on the predetermined line. Then, the shorter the interval time and the variation time, the higher the expectation for a big hit.

When a predetermined time has elapsed (when the continuous combo period ends), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 125(G). Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 125(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the suspension image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[Pseudo continuous production C]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 126(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(B), a combo plunge effect is executed. In the combo plunge effect, a message image “continuous combo plunge” is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the same color combination. Here, the left effect design 8L is “0”, the middle effect design 8C is “4”, and the right effect design 8R is “6”, and these effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all blue. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(D), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the same color combination. Here, the left effect design 8L is "7", the middle effect design 8C is "1", the right effect design 8R is "9", and these effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are all red. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(F), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..
Then, until the predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the process moves from FIG. 126(F) to FIG. 126(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-variation effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. Moreover, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the variation time from the re-fluctuation effect to the tentative stop effect are shortened. The interval time and the variation time may be shortened when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of a specific color (for example, red) are aligned. Then, the shorter the interval time and the variation time, the higher the expectation for a big hit.

When the predetermined time has elapsed (when the continuous combo period has ended), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 126(G). Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the suspension image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[Pseudo continuous production D]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo continuous effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(B), a combo entry effect is executed. In the combo plunge effect, a message image “continuous combo plunge” is displayed on the display screen.
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(C), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped by the special symbol "continuation". Here, the left effect design 8L is "5", the middle effect design 8C is "continue", and the right effect design 8R is "4".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(D), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(E), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped by the special symbol "continuation". Here, the left effect design 8L is "8", the middle effect design 8C is "continue", and the right effect design 8R is "2".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(F), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..
Then, until a predetermined time elapses (until the period of the continuous combo ends), the process moves from FIG. 127(F) to FIG. 127(C), and the temporary stop effect and the re-changing effect are repeated. At this time, the arrangement of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporary stop effect is different. Moreover, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the variation time from the re-fluctuation effect to the tentative stop effect are shortened. Then, the shorter the interval time and the variation time, the higher the expectation for a big hit.

When the predetermined time has elapsed (when the continuous combo period has ended), the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 127(G). Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 127(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at "7". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the suspension image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the pseudo continuous effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a continuous combo is entered, the temporary stop effect and the re-fluctuation effect are repeated until the period of the continuous combo ends (FIGS. 124(B) to (F) and FIG. 125(B). -(F), FIG. 126(B)-(F), and FIG. 127(B)-(F). Moreover, the repetitive time from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the fluctuation again with the temporary stop interposed becomes shorter. According to this configuration, the pseudo-repeating continues for a certain period, and the interval at which the pseudo-repeating is repeated becomes shorter, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-fluctuation effect and the variation time from the re-fluctuation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened. According to this structure, since the pseudo-repeating repeating interval becomes shorter, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the temporary stop effect, a configuration in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped in a predetermined arrangement is illustrated (FIGS. 124(C)(F), 125(C)(F). )). According to this configuration, the repetition of pseudo-repeating can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the special symbols are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect (FIG. 125(E), FIG. 127(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the repetition of pseudo-repeating can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the temporary stop effect, the special symbol is temporarily stopped, and thus the repeating time is shortened (FIG. 125(E)). With this configuration, the change in the repetition time can be easily understood, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the shorter the repetition time, the higher the expectation for a big hit. According to this configuration, the repetition of pseudo-repeating becomes interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modified example of the pseudo continuous effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the configuration in which the repetition time of the pseudo run repeated in the predetermined period is shortened has been described, but the repetition time of the pseudo run may be increased. Alternatively, it may be configured to be long or short.

[Modification 2]
In the above, both the interval time from the temporary stop effect to the re-variation effect and the variation time from the re-variation effect to the temporary stop effect are shortened, but at least one of the interval time and the variation time is shortened. The configuration may be changed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing repetitive pseudo-repeated productions in which a pseudo-repeated production in which variation starts is temporarily stopped and pseudo-reproduction that starts variation again is repeated for a predetermined period.
The repeated pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the repetition time from the change of the effect pattern to the change again after the temporary stop is changed within the predetermined period.

[Aspect C3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
The repetitive pseudo continuous production is a variable time that constitutes the repetitive time, which is a time from the start of fluctuation to the temporary stop, and a time from the temporary stop to start the fluctuation again. A gaming machine characterized by an effect that at least one of the interval times changes.

[Aspect C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
In the repetitive pseudo continuous production, the production symbols are temporarily stopped in a predetermined arrangement.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
In the repetitive pseudo continuous production, a special design among the production designs may be temporarily stopped.

[Aspect C3-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-4,
In the repetitive pseudo continuous production, the repetitive time is changed by temporarily stopping the special symbol. A game machine.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
In the repetitive pseudo continuous production, the greater the change in the repetitive time, the greater the expectation for a big hit.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The repetitive pseudo continuous production is performed on the display screen of the first display device, and a hold image corresponding to the hold storage can be displayed on the display screen of the second display device different from the first display device. A gaming machine.

The decorative symbol facing effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. This decorative symbol facing effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative pattern facing production A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect A. In the decorative symbol facing effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), a decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative pattern 8L changes slowly (moves slowly) downward, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R change slowly (moving slowly) upward. In this case, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R fluctuate upward at the same speed in the lined state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), a decorative pattern temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been changing at a low speed are effects that are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed as "7 symbol", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed as "8 symbol", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed as "8 symbol". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the stop display of "7 8 8", and show the chances (chance up display) of increasing the jackpot expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(D), a decorative symbol re-variation effect is performed. In the decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(E), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRZE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot design display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot designs on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects by the character CRZE are performed.

[Decorative pattern opposite production B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect B. In the decorative symbol facing effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), a decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative pattern 8L changes slowly (moves slowly) downward, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R change slowly (moving slowly) upward. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates upward at a faster speed than the decorative pattern 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design 8R may be changed in the upward direction at a slower speed than the decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been changing at a low speed are effects that are stopped and displayed on the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed as "7 symbol", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed as "8 symbol", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed as "8 symbol". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the stop display of "7 8 8", and show the chances (chance up display) of increasing the jackpot expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(D), a decorative symbol re-variation effect is performed. In the decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(E), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRZE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot design display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot designs on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects by the character CRZE are performed.

[Decorative pattern facing production C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect C. In the decorative symbol facing effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), a decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative pattern 8L changes slowly (moves slowly) downward, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R change slowly (moving slowly) upward. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates upward at a faster speed than the decorative pattern 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design 8R may be changed in the upward direction at a slower speed than the decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative design temporary stop effect, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R that have changed at a low speed are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side slightly above the reach line LN. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed as "7 symbol", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed as "8 symbol", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed as "8 symbol". In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the stop display of "7 8 8", and show the chances (chance up display) of increasing the jackpot expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(D), a decorative symbol re-variation effect is performed. In the decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(E), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRZE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot design display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot designs on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects by the character CRZE are performed.

[Decorative pattern opposite production D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol facing effect D. In the decorative symbol facing effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(B), a decorative symbol low speed variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect, the decorative pattern 8L changes slowly (moves slowly) downward, and the decorative patterns 8C and 8R change slowly (moving slowly) upward. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C fluctuates upward at a faster speed than the decorative pattern 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design 8R may be changed in the upward direction at a slower speed than the decorative design 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(C), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R that have been changing at a low speed are stopped and displayed at a position different from the reach line LN. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed in parallel slightly above the reach line LN. Moreover, in this decorative design temporary stop effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed with a predetermined chance-up design. This chance-up design is a design that is not included in the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are changing during the decorative design change effect, and this decorative design temporary stop effect is produced. At times, it is a design included in the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. When this chance-up symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a so-called chance eye (chance-up display), which indicates that the jackpot expectation level has increased. In the figure, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed as "7 symbol", the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed as "8 symbol", and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed as "8 symbol".

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(D), a decorative symbol re-variation effect is performed. In the decorative symbol re-variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed again near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(E), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character CRZE.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot design display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot designs on the reach line LN. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects by the character CRZE are performed.

[Modification]
In the decorative pattern facing effect, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed in the downward direction, at that time, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are variably displayed in the upward direction, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The effect may be repeated a plurality of times, and the larger the number of repetitions, the higher the jackpot expectation.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern facing effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative pattern facing effect, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed in the downward direction, at that time, the decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed in the upward direction, and then the decorative patterns 8L and 8C are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the fluctuating effect in which the decorative patterns move in opposite directions (opposite directions) is performed, it is possible to dynamically perform the fluctuating effect such that the decorative pattern moves away or approaches in the fluctuating effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative pattern facing effect, the chance up display is performed by the stop mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, since the opportunity up display advantageous for the player is performed after the dynamic fluctuating effect, it is possible to continuously give the player an interest until the decorative design is stopped from the fluctuating effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative pattern facing effect, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed in the downward direction, at that time, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are variably displayed in the upward direction, and thereafter, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the fluctuating effect in which the decorative patterns move in opposite directions (opposite directions) is performed, it is possible to dynamically perform the fluctuating effect such that the decorative pattern moves away or approaches in the fluctuating effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative pattern facing effect, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed downward, and at that time, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are variably displayed upward, but the moving speeds of the decorative pattern 8C and the decorative pattern 8R are different. According to this configuration, a dynamic variation effect can be performed by the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8C. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative pattern opposing effect, the decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed in the downward direction, at that time, the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are variably displayed in the upward direction, and then the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The effect is repeated a plurality of times, and the larger the number of repetitions, the higher the jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, the more the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed, the more happy the player is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the variable effect using the decorative patterns. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZE-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of variably displaying the first decorative pattern in the first direction,
The second display effect is an effect in which the second decorative pattern is variably displayed in a second direction opposite to the first direction,
The third display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZE-1,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, a chance up display is performed in a stop display mode including the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZE-1 or aspect ZE-2,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the third decorative pattern is variably displayed in the second direction,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect and the second display effect are being performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZE-3,
The second decorative symbol in the second display effect and the third decorative symbol in the fourth display effect differ in speed of movement in the second direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZE-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZE-1 to ZE-4,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, and then the series of effects in which the third display effect is performed is repeated a plurality of times, and the number of repetitions. The higher the number, the higher the jackpot expectation,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
○ In the case of a big hit, a big hit pattern array including the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern may be formed on a predetermined line, and in the third display effect, the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. At least one of the decorative patterns is not stopped and displayed on a predetermined line.
In the third display effect, the first decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is a decorative pattern that is not included in the decorative patterns that are variably displayed during the first display effect.

The decorative symbol prefetch display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135. This decorative pattern pre-reading display effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (for example, during the pseudo continuous effect) or during the big hit game. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the pending change suggestion image effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image data is read. The effect is to display an image on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R).

[Decorative pattern prefetch display effect A]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol prefetch display effect A. In the decorative pattern prefetch display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 132(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of notifying a hit or a loss is also referred to as "one set of decorative design". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 132(A), the four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, a description will be given of a decorative symbol preread display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is preread, and the preread display effect is performed on the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the leftmost fourth hold among the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 132A will be described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in the mode of "472" that is a loss. .. The image showing the number "4" of the left decorative design 8L is "blue", the image showing the number "7" of the middle decorative design 8C is "red", and the image showing the number "2" of the right decorative design 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers “1” to “9”, the images representing the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9” are “red”. The images representing the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are “blue”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(C), on the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the specific left decorative design 8LZ is provisionally stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AZ for the third suspension. That is, as the pre-reading effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ in which the specific image is displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here is a smiling face image, and the whole is represented by "red". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative design 8LZ, the images of "red" representing the numbers "3" and "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. Thus, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are “ It is an image of “red”, and one of the decorative designs (left decorative design 8L) is stopped and displayed as the specific decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(E), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the holding end. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative are displayed. The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, by the pre-reading of the second specific holding icon 9AZ, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific medium decorative pattern 8CZ are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ during the previous change. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative design 8LZ and the specific middle decorative design 8CZ, the "red" image representing the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative design 8R as usual. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are “as look-ahead effects. It is an image of “red”, and two of the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed in the specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(G), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AZ for the first hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific medium decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ are temporarily stopped and displayed. R. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative design 8LZ and the specific middle decorative design 8CZ during the previous change. In this way, during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are “as a look-ahead effect. It is an image of "red" and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(I), the hold icon 9A is shift-shifted by the hold exhaustion in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the particular relevant hold icon 9CZ that is the target of prefetching. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 132(J), the state in which the fixed stop display is performed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect B]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol prefetch display effect B. In the decorative pattern prefetch display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 133(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of notifying a hit or a loss is also referred to as "one set of decorative design". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 133(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, a description will be given of a decorative symbol preread display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is preread, and the preread display effect is performed on the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the leftmost fourth hold among the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 133A will be described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in the mode of misalignment "472". .. The image showing the number "4" of the left decorative design 8L is "blue", the image showing the number "7" of the middle decorative design 8C is "red", and the image showing the number "2" of the right decorative design 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers “1” to “9”, the images representing the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9” are “red”. The images representing the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are “blue”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(C), on the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the specific left decorative design 8LZ is provisionally stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AZ for the third suspension. That is, as the pre-reading effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ in which the specific image is displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is an image that represents a specific target, and here, it is an image that combines a smiling face image and a square image with the word "chance" under the smiling face image, and Is represented by "red". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative design 8LZ, the images of "red" representing the numbers "3" and "5" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. Thus, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are “ It is an image of “red”, and one of the decorative designs (left decorative design 8L) is stopped and displayed as the specific decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(E), the hold icon 9A is shift-shifted by the hold exhaustion in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are displayed. The pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, by the pre-reading of the second specific holding icon 9AZ, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific medium decorative pattern 8CZ are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ during the previous change. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative design 8LZ and the specific middle decorative design 8CZ, the "red" image representing the number "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative design 8R as usual. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are “as look-ahead effects. It is an image of “red”, and two of the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed in the specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(G), the shift movement of the hold icon 9A due to the hold exhaustion is performed in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative The pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AZ for the first hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific medium decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ are temporarily stopped and displayed. R. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative design 8LZ and the specific middle decorative design 8CZ during the previous change. In this way, during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are “as a look-ahead effect. It is an image of "red" and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(I), the holding icon 9A is shift-shifted by holding down in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the particular relevant hold icon 9CZ that is the target of prefetching. ) Is executed

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 133(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in the jackpot mode “777”. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of winning than usual. In addition,

[Decorative pattern look-ahead display effect C]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol prefetch display effect C. In the decorative pattern read-ahead display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 134(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of notifying a hit or a loss is also referred to as "one set of decorative design". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 134(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, a description will be given of a decorative symbol preread display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is preread, and the preread display effect is performed on the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the leftmost fourth hold among the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 134A will be described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in the manner of a deviation "472". .. The image showing the number "4" of the left decorative design 8L is "blue", the image showing the number "7" of the middle decorative design 8C is "red", and the image showing the number "2" of the right decorative design 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers “1” to “9”, the images representing the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9” are “red”. The images representing the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are “blue”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold consumption. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134D, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative are displayed. The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the specific left decorative design 8LZ is provisionally stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AZ for the third suspension. That is, as the pre-reading effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ in which the specific image is displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, here, a smiling face image, and is entirely represented by "blue". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative design 8LZ, the images of "blue" representing the numbers "8" and "6" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R. Thus, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are “ It is an image of “blue”, and one of the decorative designs (left decorative design 8L) is stopped and displayed as the specific decorative design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the holding icon 9A is shift-moved by the holding consumption in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, by the pre-reading of the second specific holding icon 9AZ, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific medium decorative pattern 8CZ are temporarily stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ during the previous change. After the temporary stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ and the specific medium decorative pattern 8CZ, the "blue" image representing the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are “as look-ahead effects. It is an image of "blue", and two of the decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed in the specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(G), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the holding end. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative are displayed. The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AZ for the first hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ, the specific medium decorative pattern 8CZ, and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ are temporarily stopped and displayed. R. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative design 8LZ and the specific middle decorative design 8CZ during the previous change. In this way, during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are “as a look-ahead effect. It is an image of "blue" and is stopped and displayed with a specific decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(I), the holding icon 9A is shift-moved by the holding consumption in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the particular relevant hold icon 9CZ that is the target of prefetching. ) Is executed

Then, as shown in FIG. 134(J), the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 134(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in the jackpot mode “777”. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern prefetch display effect D]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol prefetch display effect D. In the decorative pattern prefetch display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 135(A), a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of notifying a hit or a loss is also referred to as "one set of decorative design". On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 135(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontal direction) in a straight line on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Here, a description will be given of a decorative symbol preread display effect in which the specific hold icon 9AZ, which is one of the four hold icons 9A, is preread, and the preread display effect is performed on the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the leftmost fourth hold among the four hold icons 9A shown in FIG. 135A will be described as the specific hold icon 9AZ. Here, of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching is called the specific hold icon 9AZ. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of misalignment "472". .. The image showing the number "4" of the left decorative design 8L is "blue", the image showing the number "7" of the middle decorative design 8C is "red", and the image showing the number "2" of the right decorative design 8R is "blue". Is. In this embodiment, among the images representing the numbers “1” to “9”, the images representing the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “9” are “red”. The images representing the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are “blue”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the holding end. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(D), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, by the pre-reading of the specific hold icon 9AZ of the third hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images are displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ in which the first specific image is displayed, the specific middle decorative pattern in which the second specific image is displayed 8CZ and the specific right decorative pattern 8RZ are temporarily stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target. The first specific image is an image in which a smiling face image and a square image in which a character of “chance” is included under the smiling face image are combined, and the whole is represented by “red”. The second specific image is a smiling face image, and is entirely represented by "red". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Thus, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are “ It is an image of "red", and one of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) is stopped and displayed as the specific decorative pattern showing the first specific image, and the remaining two decorative patterns (the middle decorative pattern 8C). , The right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed with the specific decorative pattern showing the second specific image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold consumption. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AZ for the second hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images are displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative pattern 8LZ in which the first specific image is displayed, the specific medium decorative pattern 8CZ, and the second specific image are displayed. The specified right decorative pattern 8RZ is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are “as look-ahead effects. It is an image of "red", and two of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative pattern showing the first specific image, and the remaining one decorative pattern (Right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed as a specific decorative pattern showing the second specific image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(G), the shift movement of the hold icon 9A due to the hold exhaustion is performed in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the first hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AZ. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(H), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are variably displayed, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative The symbols 8C and the right decorative symbols 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the specific decoration pattern in which the specific image is displayed on the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the prefetching of the specific reserved icon 9AZ for the first reservation. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, the specific left decorative design 8LZ, the specific medium decorative design 8CZ, and the specific right decorative design 8RZ in which the first specific image is displayed are provisional. It will be stopped. In this way, during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, all of the three decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R) are “as a look-ahead effect. It is an image of "red", and is stopped and displayed with the specific decorative pattern in which the first specific image is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(I), the hold icon 9A is shift-shifted by the hold consumption in the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AZ corresponding to the first hold is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) corresponding to the particular relevant hold icon 9CZ that is the target of prefetching. ) Is executed

Then, as shown in FIG. 135(J), the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit or a loss. In FIG. 135(J), a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in the jackpot mode “777” is shown. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of winning than usual.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern look-ahead display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, which is a combination of decorative patterns of the same type, is pre-read during the change. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the right decorative pattern 8R) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern) temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect. 8R) has different expectation of winning depending on the type of decorative design. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, during the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, a set of decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the first effect. A set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) that is a combination of decorative patterns of the same type as (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is temporarily stopped. The displayed second effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of temporary stop display in the first effect during the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed. A set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) that is a combination of decorative patterns of the same type as the decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) It is possible to execute the third effect that is temporarily displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, after the first effect, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is hit. Or, a confirmation stop display for notifying the deviation is made. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect. Is a combination of decorative patterns of the same color (blue, red). According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect. Is a combination of a decorative pattern of the first color (blue) and a combination of a decorative pattern of a second color (red) different from the first color (blue). When the set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is a combination of the second color (red) decorative patterns, the first color (blue) decorative pattern The expectation of winning is higher than that of the combination.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative pattern prefetch display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, the look-ahead effect during the change three times before, twice before, and one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ is performed, but for example, the specific hold icon 9AZ The preceding look-ahead effect during the fluctuation corresponding to 1 may be performed, and the preceding look-ahead effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ may be performed. ..
[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern read-ahead display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, as a changing read-ahead effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern) that is a combination of decorative patterns of the same color. 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is temporarily stopped, but this set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is the same figure, pattern, pattern, character decoration, etc. It may be a combination of symbols.
[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern pre-reading display effect of FIGS. 132 to 135, as the changing pre-reading effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, a set of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle) which is a combination of the same blue or red decorative patterns. Although the decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the color of the decorative pattern may be a color other than blue and red.
[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern prefetch display effect D of FIG. 135, as a changing prefetch effect corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AZ, a set of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol) that is a combination of decorative symbols having the same red color but different types of images. 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is temporarily displayed, but at least one of a plurality of types is a combination of the same decorative design (left decorative design 8L, middle) The decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R) may be used.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can be notified whether or not the hit,
It is possible to execute the first effect in which the set of decorative symbols, which is a combination of decorative symbols of the same type, is temporarily stopped and displayed by the look-ahead during the change,
In the first effect, the degree of expectation of winning varies depending on the type of decorative design that constitutes the one set of decorative design that is temporarily stopped,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
During the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, the one set of decorative symbols, which is a combination of decorative symbols of the same type as the one set of temporary decorative symbols displayed in the first effect. Is able to execute the second effect in which is temporarily displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-1 or aspect C5-2,
During the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed, the set of the set that is a combination of decorative patterns of the same type as the set of decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first effect It is possible to execute a third effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3,
After the first effect, a fixed stop display for notifying a hit or a loss is made by the set of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
In the first effect, the set of decorative patterns temporarily displayed is a combination of decorative patterns of the same color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect C5-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-5,
In the first effect, the set of the decorative patterns temporarily displayed is a combination of decorative patterns of a first color and a combination of decorative patterns of a second color different from the first color. And if there is,
In the case where the one set of decorative patterns is a combination of the decorative patterns of the second color, the probability of hit is higher than that in the case of a combination of the decorative patterns of the first color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern prefetching effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. This decorative pattern pre-reading effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative pattern prefetching effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative pattern prefetching effect, the left sub display device 10L or the right sub display device 10R). Change the position and tilt of.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead production A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern prefetching effect A. In the decorative pattern prefetching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 136(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of notifying a hit or a loss is also referred to as "one set of decorative design". On the left sub display device 10L, four reservation icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the decorative pattern pre-reading effect in which the specific holding icon 9AT that is one of the four holding icons 9A is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative pattern will be described. In this embodiment, the leftmost fourth hold among the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 136A will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 136(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. In FIG. 136(A), after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed at "789", the hold icon 9C disappears (hold is consumed). As shown in FIG. 136(B), in the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the holding end. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

As shown in FIG. 136(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is variably displayed, and then left decorative design 8L, right decorative. The symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time,
The specific left decorative design 8LT is stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AT for the third suspension. That is, as the prefetch effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the specific image is displayed is stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the images showing numbers (here, “2” and “6”) are stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R as the hold is exhausted. Thus, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, one decorative design (left decorative design 8L) is stopped and displayed as the specific decorative design as the prefetch effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(D), in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variably displayed, left decorative symbol 8L. , The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AT for the second hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in order. That is, the specific left decorative design 8LT and the specific right decorative design 8RT in which the specific image is displayed are stopped and displayed as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT during the previous change. After the stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, the image in which the number (here, “6”) is displayed is stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R by the hold exhaustion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as the look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(F), in the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are variably displayed, and then left decorative pattern 8L. , The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are sequentially stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative design 8LT, the specific right decorative design 8RT, and the specific medium decorative design 8CT in which the specific images are displayed are stopped and displayed. To be done. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative design 8LT and the specific right decorative design 8RT during the previous change. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R by the hold exhaustion. In this way, during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbols as the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(H), in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the holding end. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R. R. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of prefetching is started.

In the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. Is displayed. The corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as the look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and the corresponding image CRG is also a smiling face image. The corresponding image CRG may be any image as long as it corresponds to the specific image, and need not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be one in which the content of the specific image is represented by characters, or the shape of the specific image may be deformed. The corresponding image CRG may move. After that, as shown in FIG. 136(J), the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit or lost. FIG. 136(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in a jackpot mode. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead production B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern prefetching effect B. In the decorative pattern prefetching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 137(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of notifying a hit or a loss is also referred to as "one set of decorative design". On the left sub display device 10L, four reservation icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the decorative pattern pre-reading effect in which the specific holding icon 9AT that is one of the four holding icons 9A is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative pattern will be described. In this embodiment, the leftmost fourth hold among the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 137A will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 137(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. In FIG. 137(A), after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, the hold icon 9C disappears (hold is consumed). As shown in FIG. 137(B), in the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the holding end. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

As shown in FIG. 137(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is variably displayed, and then left decorative design 8L, right decorative. The symbols 8R and the medium decoration symbols 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time,
The specific left decorative design 8LT is stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AT for the third suspension. That is, as the prefetch effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the specific image is displayed is stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here, represents a part of the left side of the smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is also referred to as a "first specific image". After the stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the images showing numbers (here, “2” and “6”) are stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R as the hold is exhausted. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific decorative design is stopped and displayed on one decorative design (left decorative design 8L) as the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(D), in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variably displayed, left decorative symbol 8L. , The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed are stopped and displayed in order. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decoration in which the second specific image is displayed The design 8RT is stopped and displayed. The first specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT during the previous fluctuation. The second specific image represents a part of the right side of the smiling face image. After the stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, the image in which the number (here, “6”) is displayed is stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R by the hold exhaustion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as the look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(F), in the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the holding end. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is variably displayed and then left decorative design 8L. , The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AT for the first hold, the specific decorative patterns representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in order. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decoration in which the second specific image is displayed The symbol 8RT and the specific medium decorative symbol 8CT in which the third specific image is displayed are stopped and displayed. The first specific image and the second specific image are the same as those shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT during the previous change. The third specific image represents a part of the center of the smiling face image. By arranging the first specific image, the second specific image, and the third specific image in a line, one face image with a smile is formed. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R by the hold exhaustion. In this way, during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbols as the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(H), the holding icons 9A are shifted and moved in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R. R. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of prefetching is started.

In the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. Is displayed. The corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as the look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a smiling face image, and the corresponding image CRG is a character image represented as “Smile!!!!!”. As described above, the corresponding image CRG is not limited to the specific image as long as it is the image corresponding to the specific image. After that, as shown in FIG. 137(J), three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 137(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in a jackpot mode. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern prefetching effect C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern prefetching effect C. In the decorative pattern prefetching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 138(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of notifying a hit or a loss is also referred to as "one set of decorative design". On the left sub display device 10L, four reservation icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the decorative pattern pre-reading effect in which the specific holding icon 9AT that is one of the four holding icons 9A is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative pattern will be described. In this embodiment, the leftmost fourth hold among the four hold icons 9A in FIG. 138(A) will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 138(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in the horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. In FIG. 138(A), after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, the hold icon 9C disappears (hold is consumed). As shown in FIG. 138(B), in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the holding end. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

As shown in FIG. 138(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is variably displayed, and then left decorative design 8L, right decorative. The symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time,
The specific left decorative design 8LT is stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AT for the third suspension. That is, as the prefetch effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the specific image is displayed is stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here is a character image representing the hiragana "ma". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the specific image displayed on the specific left decorative pattern 8LT is also referred to as a "first specific image". After the stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the images showing numbers (here, “2” and “6”) are stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R as the hold is exhausted. In this way, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific decorative design is stopped and displayed on one decorative design (left decorative design 8L) as the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(D), in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variably displayed, left decorative symbol 8L. , The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AT of the second hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed are stopped and displayed in order. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decoration in which the second specific image is displayed The design 8RT is stopped and displayed. The first specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT during the previous fluctuation. The second specific image is a character image representing a hiragana “ka”. After the stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, the image in which the number (here, “6”) is displayed is stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R by the hold exhaustion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as the look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(F), the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved by holding down in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variably displayed, left decorative symbol 8L. , The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AT for the first hold, the specific decorative patterns representing the specific images corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in order. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the first specific image is displayed and the specific right decoration in which the second specific image is displayed The symbol 8RT and the specific medium decorative symbol 8CT in which the third specific image is displayed are stopped and displayed. The first specific image and the second specific image are the same as those shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT during the previous change. The third specific image is a character image representing “sa” of hiragana. By arranging the first specific image, the second specific image, and the third specific image in a line, the word has one meaning of "No way." After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R by the hold exhaustion. In this way, during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbols as the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(H), the holding icons 9A are shifted and moved in the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R. R. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of prefetching is started.

In the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. Is displayed. The corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as the look-ahead effect. Here, the specific image is a character image of "Masaka", and the corresponding image CRG is a character image expressed as "Masaka!!!!!". The corresponding image CRG may be any image as long as it corresponds to the specific image, and need not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be a character having the same meaning as the content of the specific image, a font changed, or a character converted into a Roman character or Katakana. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138(J), the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 138(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in a jackpot mode. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of winning than usual.

[Decorative pattern look-ahead effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern prefetching effect D. In the decorative pattern prefetching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 139(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). On the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a left decorative design 8L, a middle decorative design 8C, and a right decorative design 8R are displayed. Here, a combination of three decorative designs (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) capable of notifying a hit or a loss is also referred to as "one set of decorative design". On the left sub display device 10L, four reservation icons 9A are displayed side by side (horizontally) in a straight line. Here, the decorative pattern pre-reading effect in which the specific holding icon 9AT that is one of the four holding icons 9A is pre-read and the pre-reading effect is executed on the decorative pattern will be described. In this embodiment, the leftmost fourth hold among the four hold icons 9A of FIG. 139(A) will be described as the specific hold icon 9AT. Here, of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon that is the target of prefetching is called the specific hold icon 9AT.

As shown in FIG. 139(A), on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, four hold icons 9A are arranged (displayed) in a straight line in a horizontal direction along the horizontal side of the display screen. There is. The hold icon 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. In FIG. 139(A), after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed at “789”, the hold icon 9C disappears (hold is consumed). As shown in FIG. 139(B), in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second to fourth hold moves to the right by one (shift movement) to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first to third hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the third hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

As shown in FIG. 139(C), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) are variably displayed, then left decorative pattern 8L, right decorative The symbols 8R and the middle decorative symbols 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time,
The specific left decorative design 8LT is stopped and displayed as the left decorative design 8L by prefetching the specific reserved icon 9AT for the third suspension. That is, as the prefetch effect during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT in which the specific image is displayed is stopped and displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here, it is a character image representing "No way!!!". The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. After the stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the images showing numbers (here, “2” and “6”) are stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R as the hold is exhausted. As described above, during the change three times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, a specific image is displayed as one look-ahead effect on one decorative design (left decorative design 8L).

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(D), in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R), the hold icon 9A is shifted and moved due to the hold exhaustion. On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second and third hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first and second hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. By this shift movement, the hold icon 9A for the second hold becomes the specific hold icon 9AT. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(E), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the decorative design (left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right decorative design 8R) is variably displayed and then left decorative design 8L. , The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AT for the second hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in order. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative design 8LT and the specific right decorative design 8RT respectively displaying the specific image are stopped and displayed. This specific image is the same as that shown in the specific left decorative pattern 8LT during the previous change. After the stop display of the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, the image in which the number (here, “6”) is displayed is stopped and displayed on the middle decorative pattern 8C as usual. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R by the hold exhaustion. In this way, during the change two times before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol as the look-ahead effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(F), the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved by holding down in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the second hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one to become the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the first hold of the left sub display device 10L is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R by the shift movement. Then, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(G), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, after the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are variably displayed, left decorative symbol 8L. , The right decorative pattern 8R and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order. At this time, by the look-ahead of the specific hold icon 9AT of the first hold, the specific decorative patterns in which the same specific image is displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are sequentially stopped and displayed. That is, as the look-ahead effect during the change one time before the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, the specific left decorative pattern 8LT, the specific right decorative pattern 8RT, and the specific medium decorative pattern 8CT that are respectively displayed with the specific image are stopped and displayed. R. This specific image is the same as the one stopped and displayed on the specific left decorative pattern 8LT and the specific right decorative pattern 8RT during the previous change. After that, the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R by the hold exhaustion. In this way, during the variation one time before the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT, all (three) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbols as the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(H), the holding icon 9A is shifted and moved by holding down in the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). On the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the specific hold icon 9AT corresponding to the first hold is moved (shifted) to the right by one, and the specific hold icon 9CT is displayed at the hold position of the right sub display device 10R. R. Then, the variable display corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT that is the target of prefetching is started.

In the change corresponding to the specific hold icon 9CT, the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are not displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, and the corresponding image CRG is displayed. Is displayed. The corresponding image CRG is an image corresponding to the specific image displayed on the specific decorative pattern as the look-ahead effect. In this case, the specific image is a character image representing “Masaka!!!”, and the corresponding image CRG is also a character image representing “Masaka!!!”. The corresponding image CRG may be any image as long as it corresponds to the specific image, and need not be the same as the specific image. For example, the corresponding image CRG may be a character having the same meaning as the content of the specific image, a font changed, or a character converted into a Roman character or Katakana. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139(J), the three decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are fixedly stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit or a loss. FIG. 139(J) shows a state in which the fixed stop display is performed in a jackpot mode. The above-mentioned look-ahead effect suggests that the variation corresponding to the specific hold icon 9AT has a higher expectation of winning than usual.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the decorative pattern pre-reading production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the specific decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as at least one decorative symbol of the set of decorative symbols by the look-ahead during the change. And the second effect in which, after the first effect, the corresponding image CRG corresponding to the specific image represented by the specific decorative pattern is displayed during the change corresponding to the look-ahead. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, during the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, the specific decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the first effect is displayed. It is possible to execute a third effect in which a specific decorative pattern larger in number than the number is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the specific decoration that is stopped and displayed in the first effect during the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed. It is possible to execute the fourth effect in which the specific decorative symbols smaller in number than the symbols are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, after the second effect, a fixed stop display for notifying a hit or a deviation is given by a set of decorative symbols. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 to 139, the specific decorative pattern includes an image representing a predetermined character, and the second effect has the same content as the predetermined character. The image is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, in the third effect, all of the set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbols. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the decorative pattern look-ahead effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D, the number of specific decorative symbols is increased by "0", "1", "2", "3" for each variable effect. However, the number of specific decorative patterns may be arbitrarily increased. For example, after FIG. 138(B), FIG. 138(E) may be executed without executing FIG. 138(C)(D). In this case, the number of specific decorative patterns increases to “0”, “2”, and “3”. After FIG. 138(B), FIG. 138(G) may be executed without executing FIGS. 138(C) to (F). In this case, the number of specific decorative patterns increases to “0” and “3”. The same applies to FIGS. 136, 137, and 139.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern pre-reading effects A to D, the description has been made as the pre-reading effect of the holding icon 9A corresponding to the special drawing 1, but the decorative design pre-reading effect may be executed as the pre-reading effect of the holding icon 9B corresponding to the special drawing 2. ..

[Modification 3]
The decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D may change the content of the specific image depending on the difference in expectation of the jackpot. For example, the method of the prefetching effect of FIG. 137 may have a higher expectation of a big hit than the prefetching effect of FIG. 136.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern prefetching effects A to D, the specific decorative pattern may not be displayed in the order of the left decorative pattern, the right decorative pattern, and the middle decorative pattern. For example, the specific decorative pattern is displayed first in the medium decorative pattern, and in the next change, the medium decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern become the specific decorative pattern, and finally, all the three become the specific decorative pattern. Good. In addition, in the decorative pattern prefetching effects A to D, the effect may be ended in the middle. For example, after FIG. 138(A) to (F), FIG. 138(A) may be executed again instead of FIG. 138(G).

[Modification 5]
The decorative pattern look-ahead effects A to D have been described as being executed during a plurality of variable effects. However, the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D may be executed as a pseudo continuous effect during one variation effect. For example, after the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 136(A), the variable display is resumed as shown in FIG. 136(B) without the holding consumption, and then the decorative design as shown in FIG. 136(C). The temporary stop display may be displayed again, and the re-change of FIGS. 136(D), (F), and (H) and the temporary stop display of FIGS. 136(E) and (G) may be alternately repeated. Further, the decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D may be executed by combining the continuous notice that the holding digestion is repeated and the pseudo continuous production in which the holding digestion is once. For example, in FIGS. 136(C) and 136(E), the holding is exhausted each time as a continuous notice, and in FIGS. 136(F) to (J), even if it is executed by one holding exhaustion as the pseudo continuous production. Good. The decorative symbol look-ahead effects A to D may be executed by arbitrarily combining the continuous announcement and the pseudo continuous effect as described above.

[Modification 6]
The contents of the decorative pattern prefetching effects A to D may be appropriately combined. Further, the decorative pattern prefetching effects A to D may not include a part of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode C6-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can be notified whether or not the hit,
By a look-ahead during the change, a first effect in which a specific decorative pattern is stopped and displayed as at least one decorative pattern of the set of decorative patterns,
After the first effect, a second effect in which an image corresponding to the image represented by the specific decorative pattern is displayed during a change corresponding to the look-ahead is executable.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1,
During the next variation of the variation in which the first effect is executed, a third number of the specific decorative symbols that are larger than the number of the specific decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the first effect are stopped and displayed. Directing can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or aspect C6-2,
During the change immediately before the change in which the first effect is executed, a number of the specific decorative symbols less than the number of the specific decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the first effect are stopped and displayed. The fourth effect can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3,
After the second effect, a fixed stop display for notifying a hit or a deviation is made by the set of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-4,
The specific decorative pattern includes an image representing a predetermined character,
In the second effect, an image having the same content as the predetermined character is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect C6-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-2,
In the third effect, all of the one set of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as the specific decorative symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation image tilt display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. This operation image tilt display effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image data is read. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R). Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation image tilt display effect, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are included. ) Position and tilt.

[Operation image tilt display effect A]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect A. In the operation image tilt display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 140(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). .. The variable display of the decorative pattern disappears during the variable display, and the opening image OPG displayed as "Erase smile!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect of whether or not the player operates the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of decorative symbols, and the sub display device 10 may display a hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 140(B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are the same image, but may be different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). When displayed, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed with the images having different inclinations. After that, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while maintaining the state in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Move so that the display position changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 each simultaneously emit light, and the first effect image EF1 and the second effect image EF2 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(E), when the first effect image EF1 and the second effect image EF2 disappear, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are simultaneously displayed at that position, respectively. .. That is, the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2 emit light at the same time, and are switched (simultaneously) to the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2. The first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are images showing the appearance of the effect button 63, and are the same image here. When the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed at the same time, the inclinations of the images are the same as those of the first specific image TG1 and the second specific image TG2. Therefore, when the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed at the same time, the images are displayed in different inclinations. Note that the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 may have different image sizes or different image shapes. When the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 have different image inclinations. The image is displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while being maintained. After that, as shown in FIG. 140(F), the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other. Move so that the display position changes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(G), after the first button image BTN1 and the second button image BTN2 are stopped at predetermined positions on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, the "striking" is performed at the center of the display screen 7a. The operation promotion image SPG displayed as "!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SPG is an image that is currently in the operation valid period of the effect button 63 and recommends the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIGS. 140(H) and 140(I), the disappearance effect of the button image is executed. The button image disappearing effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, the button images BTN explode one by one in order according to the number of times the operation button 63 is operated (pressed), and is switched to the explosion image EX. Here, first, the second button image BTN2 is switched to the second explosion image EX2, and then the first button image BTN1 is switched to the first explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, the smoke image KM representing the smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. In FIG. 140(I), the second smoke image KM2 is displayed after the second explosion image EX2. Thus, according to the number of times the operation button 63 is operated (pressed), the button images BTN explode one by one, and when all of them explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 140(J). Is displayed and then stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

[Operation image tilt display effect B]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect B. In the operation image tilt display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 141(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). .. The variable display of the decorative pattern disappears during the variable display, and the opening image OPG displayed as "Erase smile!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect of whether or not the player operates the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of decorative symbols, and the sub display device 10 may display a hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 141(B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, the third specific image TG3, and the fourth specific image TG1 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The specific image TG4 is displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are all the same image, but may be different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). When displayed, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed in a state in which the inclinations of the images are randomly different. After that, the first to fourth specific images TG1 to TG4 are displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes randomly.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 141(C) to 141(E), the switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific images TG is randomly switched to the button image BTN or the select button image SKB. Here, first, as shown in FIG. 141(C), the second specific image TG2 and the third specific image TG3 are simultaneously (simultaneously) switched to the second select button image SKB2 and the third button image BTN3. The second select button image SKB2 is an image showing the appearance of the select button 68. The third button image BTN3 is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63. When the second select button image SKB2 and the third button image BTN3 are displayed at the same time, the tilts of the images are displayed in different states.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(D), the first specific image TG1 is switched to the first button image BTN1. The first button image BTN1 is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63, and is the same image as the third button image BTN3. When the first button image BTN1 is displayed, the tilt of the image is displayed in a state different from that of the third button image BTN3. Next, as shown in FIG. 141(E), the fourth specific image TG4 is switched to the fourth select button image SKB4. The fourth select button image SKB4 is an image showing the appearance of the select button 68, and is the same image as the second select button image SKB2. When the fourth select button image SKB4 is displayed, the tilt of the image is displayed in a state different from that of the second select button image SKB2. The first button image BTN1, the second select button image SKB2, the third button image BTN3, and the fourth select button image SKB4 are stopped and displayed with their images having different inclinations. It should be noted that these may not be displayed in a stopped state, but may be displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while the inclination of the image remains different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(F), the operation promotion image SPG, which is displayed as "hit!!", is displayed above the display screen 7a. The operation promotion image SPG is an image which is currently in the operation valid period of the effect button 63 and the select button 68 and recommends the player to operate the effect button 63 and the select button 68. When the player operates the effect button 63 and the select button 68, the disappearance effect of the button image is executed as shown in FIGS. 141(G) to 141(I). The disappearance effect of the button image is an effect in which a plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) disappear at random on the main display device 7. Here, in response to the operation (pressing) of the select button 68, as shown in FIG. 141(G), the select button images SKB explode all at once, and are switched to the explosion images EX2, EX4. After the explosion images EX2 and EX4 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 141(H), the smoke images KM2 and KM4 representing the smoke after the explosion are displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. Further, the button images BTN are sequentially exploded one by one according to the number of times the operation button 63 is operated (pressed), and are switched to the explosion image EX. Here, as shown in FIG. 141(H), first, the third button image BTN3 is switched to the third explosion image EX3, and then, as shown in FIG. 141(I), the first button image BTN1 is changed to the first button image BTN1. 1 Switch to explosion image EX1. After the explosion image EX is displayed, the smoke image KM representing the smoke after the explosion is displayed, and then the display disappears from the main display device 7. In FIG. 141(I), the third smoke image KM3 is displayed after the third explosion image EX3. In this way, the button image BTN and the select button image SKB explode in response to the operation (press) of the effect button 63 and the select button 68, and when all of them explode, as shown in FIG. 141(J), three decorations are displayed. The design is displayed and then stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

[Operation image tilt display effect C]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect C. In the operation image tilt display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 142(A), the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are located at the retracted position (home position). .. The variable display of the decorative pattern disappears during the variable display, and the opening image OPG displayed as "Erase smile!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect of whether or not the player operates the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of decorative symbols, and the sub display device 10 may display a hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 142(B), when the game effect is started, the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 and the display screens of the sub display devices 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) are 1st specific image TG1, 2nd specific image TG2, 3rd specific image TG3, 4th specific image TG4, 5th specific image TG5, 6th specific image TG6, 7th specific image TG7, 8th The specific image TG8 is displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same image, but may be different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When displayed, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are respectively displayed so as to be inclined such that the lower side of the face images faces the center position of the rings arranged side by side. In other words, when displayed, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed with the images having different inclinations. After that, as shown in FIG. 142(C), the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 randomly change their colors while maintaining the states in which the inclinations of the images are different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 simultaneously emit light, respectively, and the first effect image EF1, the second effect image EF2, the third effect image EF3, the fourth effect image EF4, and the fifth effect image EF4. The effect image EF5, the sixth effect image EF6, the seventh effect image EF7, and the eighth effect image EF8 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 142(E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, and the third button image BTN3 are located at that position, respectively. The fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are displayed at the same time. That is, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 simultaneously emit light and are switched (simultaneously) to the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images showing the appearance of the effect button 63, and are the same image here. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When displayed simultaneously, the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 have the same image inclination as the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the images are displayed in different inclinations. Note that the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 may have different image sizes, or may have different image shapes. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 142(F), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are tilted respectively. , The color of the image changes randomly while maintaining different states.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(G), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the in-display device 7 and the sub display device 10, and then, in the ring. An operation promotion image SPG, which is displayed as "hit it!!", is displayed in the center. The operation promotion image SPG is an image that is currently in the operation valid period of the effect button 63 and recommends the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIGS. 142(H) and 142(I), the disappearance effect of the button image is executed. The button image disappearing effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, according to the number of times the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the button images BTN arranged in a ring are sequentially exploded one by one, and the explosion images EX are switched. Here, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, the eighth button image BTN8. However, in order, the first explosion image EX1, the second explosion image EX2, the third explosion image EX3, the fourth explosion image EX4, the fifth explosion image EX5, the sixth explosion image EX6, the seventh explosion image EX7, the eighth explosion image. The display is switched to the image EX8, and the display disappears from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, according to the number of times the operation button 63 is operated (pressed), the button images BTN explode one by one, and when all of them explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 142(J). Is displayed and then stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

[Operation image tilt display effect D]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the operation image tilt display effect D. In the operation image tilt display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 143(A), the sub display device 10 (the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R) is located at the retracted position (home position). .. The variable display of the decorative pattern disappears during the variable display, and the opening image OPG displayed as "Erase smile!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. This opening image OPG is displayed at the start of the game effect of whether or not the player operates the effect button 63 to erase all the button images within the time limit. The display screen 7a of the main display device 7 may display a variable display of decorative symbols, and the sub display device 10 may display a hold icon 9A.

As shown in FIG. 143(B), when the game effect is started, the first specific image TG1, the second specific image TG2, and the third specific image are displayed on the display screen 7a of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The TG3, the fourth specific image TG4, the fifth specific image TG5, the sixth specific image TG6, the seventh specific image TG7, and the eighth specific image TG8 are displayed. The specific image is an image representing a specific target, and here is a smiling face image. The specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, and includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific target here includes all modes in which the number can be specified when a plurality of specific targets exist. Here, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are all the same image, but may be different images (for example, a smiling face and a crying face). The first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. When displayed, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are respectively displayed so as to be inclined such that the lower side of the face images faces the center position of the rings arranged side by side. In other words, when displayed, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are displayed with the images having different inclinations. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143(C), the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 are enlarged and displayed while expanding the ring, and the images are spread across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10, respectively. The image is displayed in a state of being rotated left and right so that the inclination of the image changes while the inclination of the image remains different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), a switching effect is executed. The switching effect is an effect in which a plurality of specific images TG are simultaneously switched to the button image BTN. Specifically, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 simultaneously emit light, respectively, and the first effect image EF1, the second effect image EF2, the third effect image EF3, the fourth effect image EF4, and the fifth effect image EF4. The effect image EF5, the sixth effect image EF6, the seventh effect image EF7, and the eighth effect image EF8 are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 143(E), when the first to eighth effect images EF1 to EF8 disappear, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, and the third button image BTN3 are respectively located at those positions. The fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, and the eighth button image BTN8 are displayed at the same time. That is, the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 simultaneously emit light and are switched (simultaneously) to the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are images showing the appearance of the effect button 63, and are the same image here. The first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed side by side in a ring shape across the main display device 7 and the sub display device 10. When displayed simultaneously, the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 have the same image inclination as the corresponding first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8. Therefore, when the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed at the same time, the images are displayed in different inclinations. Note that the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 may have different image sizes, or may have different image shapes. When the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, as shown in FIG. 143(F), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are tilted respectively. While keeping a different state at random, it moves while rotating left and right at random, and the color of the image changes randomly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(G), the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 are displayed across the in-display device 7 and the sub-display device 10 again in an annular shape, and then, At the center of the ring, an operation promotion image SPG that displays "hit it!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SPG is an image that is currently in the operation valid period of the effect button 63 and recommends the player to operate the effect button 63. When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIGS. 143(H) and 143(I), the disappearance effect of the button image is executed. The button image disappearing effect is an effect in which a plurality of button images disappear in order on the main display device 7. Here, according to the number of times the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the button images BTN arranged in a ring are sequentially exploded one by one, and the explosion images EX are switched. Here, the first button image BTN1, the second button image BTN2, the third button image BTN3, the fourth button image BTN4, the fifth button image BTN5, the sixth button image BTN6, the seventh button image BTN7, the eighth button image BTN8. However, in order, the first explosion image EX1, the second explosion image EX2, the third explosion image EX3, the fourth explosion image EX4, the fifth explosion image EX5, the sixth explosion image EX6, the seventh explosion image EX7, the eighth explosion image. The display is switched to the image EX8, and the display disappears from the main display device 7 in order. In this way, according to the number of times the operation button 63 is operated (pressed), the button images BTN explode one by one, and when all of them explode, three decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIG. 143(J). Is displayed and then stopped. Here, it is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed in a lost manner.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of operation image inclination display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 140(E), FIG. 142(E), and 143(E), a plurality of button images BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. It is possible to execute a display effect, and in this display effect, the tilts of the plurality of button images BTN are different from each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 141(C), a plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. A display effect can be executed, and in this display effect, the plurality of button images (button image BTN and select button image SKB) have different inclinations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 140(E), FIG. 142(E), and FIG. 143(E), in the display effect, a plurality of button images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The BTN is not displayed, and all the plurality of operation means images are displayed simultaneously. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 140(C) to (E), FIG. 142(C) to (E), and FIG. From the state in which the plurality of specific images TG are displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, all of the plurality of specific images TG are switched to the button images BTN all at once. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, in the display effect, the plurality of specific images TG are displayed side by side in a ring shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 143, after the display effect, the disappearance effect in which the plurality of button images BTN disappear in order can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 to 143, the extinction effect is executed along with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of operation image inclination display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image tilt display effects C to D of FIGS. 142 and 143, it has been described that the images are not displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring. However, the images may be displayed inside the first to eighth specific images TG1 to TG8 arranged in a ring. Then, for example, when the game is successful, the image may change.

[Modification 2]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the game effects when the game is successful have been described. Therefore, when the game fails, different effects may be executed. For example, in FIG. 142, when all of the first to eighth button images BTN1 to BTN8 have not disappeared within a predetermined period, the decorative design of the lost eye may be stopped and displayed.

[Modification 3]
The numbers of the specific images and button images shown in the operation image tilt display effects A to D are examples, and a different number of specific images and button images may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the disappearance effect of the button image may be executed without the player operating the effect button 63. That is, the button images may be sequentially switched to the explosion image EX without the player operating the effect button 63.

[Modification 5]
In the operation image tilt display effects A to D, the operation promotion image SPG may be a character other than “hit!!”. For example, the operation promotion image SPG may be “continuously hit!!”. Further, the opening image OPG may be a character other than "Erase smile!!!!". For example, the opening image OPG may be "Successfully complete the mission!!!".

[Modification 6]
The contents of the operation image tilt display effects A to D may be appropriately combined. Further, the operation image tilt display effects A to D may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode D1-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine comprising a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means,
It is possible to execute a display effect in which a plurality of the operation means images are displayed on the display means,
In the display effect, the inclinations of the plurality of operation means images are different from each other,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode D1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the display effect, from the state in which the plurality of operation means images are not displayed on the display means, all of the plurality of operation means images are simultaneously displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target,
In the display effect, from the state in which the plurality of specific images are displayed on the display means, all of the plurality of specific images are simultaneously switched to the operation means image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
In the display effect, the plurality of operation means images are displayed side by side in a ring shape,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
After the display effect, it is possible to execute an extinction effect in which the plurality of operation means images disappear in order,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode D1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-5,
The disappearance effect is executed in accordance with the operation of the operation means by the player,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol button stop effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. This decorative symbol button stop effect can be executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect A. In the decorative symbol button stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In the button display effect 1, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed at a position above the variable area of the decorative design 8L so as to be associated with the decorative design 8L. Thereby, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8L are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), button press effect 1 is performed. In this button press effect 1, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player who saw the button image ZF1 pressing the effect button 63. In this figure, as the decorative design 8L, "6 designs" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In the button display effect 2, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed again while the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed at a position on the variable area of the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8C. Thereby, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8C are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(E), button press effect 2 is performed. In the button press effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on that the player who saw the button image ZF1 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a stopped state of "7 symbols".

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In the button display effect 3, the button image ZF1 representing the effect button 63 is displayed again while the decorative pattern 8R is changing. This button image ZF1 is displayed at the position of the variable area on the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8R. Thereby, the player can see that the button image ZF1 and the decorative pattern 8R are associated with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(G), button press effect 3 is performed. In the button press effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on that the player who saw the button image ZF1 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN so as to be aligned with the decorative pattern 8C. In this figure, as for the decorative symbol 8R, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(H), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, on the reach line LN, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach symbol that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is displayed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE makes various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Decorative pattern button stop production B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect B. In the decorative symbol button stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 145(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF1, ZF2, ZF3 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative design 8L so as to be associated with the decorative design 8L. The button image ZF2 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8C. The button image ZF3 is displayed at a position above the variable region of the decorative design 8R so as to be associated with the decorative design 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 is associated with the decorative pattern 8L, the button image ZF2 is associated with the decorative pattern 8C, and the button image ZF3 is associated with the decorative pattern 8R. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), button press effect 1 is performed. In this button press effect 1, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player who saw the button image ZF1 pressing the effect button 63. In this figure, as the decorative design 8L, "6 designs" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In the button display effect 2, the button image ZF2 and the button image ZF3 are continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), button press effect 2 is performed. In the button press effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player who has seen the button image ZF2 pressing the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a stopped state of "7 symbols".

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In the button display effect 3, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative symbol 8R while the decorative symbol 8R is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(G), button press effect 3 is performed. In this button press effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on that the player who saw the button image ZF3 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN so as to be aligned with the decorative pattern 8C. In this figure, as for the decorative symbol 8R, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(H), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, on the reach line LN, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach symbol that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is displayed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE makes various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect C. In the decorative symbol button stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF1, ZF2, ZF3 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. The button image ZF1 is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8L so as to be associated with the decorative design 8L. The button image ZF2 is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8C. The button image ZF3 is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8R so as to be associated with the decorative design 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 is associated with the decorative pattern 8L, the button image ZF2 is associated with the decorative pattern 8C, and the button image ZF3 is associated with the decorative pattern 8R. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(C), button press effect 1 is performed. In this button press effect 1, the decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player who saw the button image ZF1 pressing the effect button 63. In this figure, as the decorative design 8L, "6 designs" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In the button display effect 2, the button image ZF2 and the button image ZF3 are continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(E), button press effect 2 is performed. In the button press effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player who has seen the button image ZF2 pressing the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a stopped state of "7 symbols".

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In the button display effect 3, the button image ZF3 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8R while the decorative pattern 8R is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(G), button press effect 3 is performed. In this button press effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on that the player who saw the button image ZF3 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN so as to be aligned with the decorative pattern 8C. In this figure, as for the decorative symbol 8R, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(H), reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, on the reach line LN, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach symbol that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is displayed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE makes various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Decorative pattern button stop effect D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol button stop effect D. In the decorative symbol button stop effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 147(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed on the reach line LN. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(B), button display effect 1 is performed. In this button display effect 1, three button images ZF4, ZF5, ZF6 representing the effect button 63 are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. The button image ZF4 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8L so as to be associated with the decorative design 8L. The button image ZF5 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8C so as to be associated with the decorative design 8C. The button image ZF6 includes a stop order suggestion display and is displayed on the variable area of the decorative design 8R so as to be associated with the decorative design 8R. From these, the player can see that the button image ZF1 is associated with the decorative pattern 8L, the button image ZF2 is associated with the decorative pattern 8C, and the button image ZF3 is associated with the decorative pattern 8R. .. In addition, the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF4 is displayed as "Ichi", the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF5 is displayed as "2", and the stop order suggestion display of the button image ZF6 is shown as "reference". Is displayed. The stop order suggestion display "Ichi" of the button image ZF4 indicates that, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative design 8L among the varying decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and displayed, The stop order suggestion display "2" of the button image ZF5 indicates that when the effect button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative design 8C among the varying decorative designs 8C and 8R is stopped and displayed, and the button image The stop order suggestion display "reference" of ZF5 indicates that when the effect button 63 is pressed, the corresponding decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop order suggestion display of the button images ZF4, ZF5, ZF6 represents the stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R when the effect button 63 is pressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(C), button press effect 1 is performed. In this button press effect 1, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LN based on the player who has seen the button image ZF4 pressing the effect button 63. In this figure, as the decorative design 8L, "6 designs" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(D), button display effect 2 is performed. In the button display effect 2, the button image ZF5 and the button image ZF6 are continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative patterns 8C and 8R while the decorative patterns 8C and 8R are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(E), button press effect 2 is performed. In the button press effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed based on the player pressing the effect button 63 when seeing the button image ZF5. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN. In this figure, the decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a stopped state of "7 symbols".

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(F), button display effect 3 is performed. In the button display effect 3, the button image ZF6 representing the effect button 63 is continuously displayed on the changing area of the decorative pattern 8R while the decorative pattern 8R is changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(G), button press effect 3 is performed. In this button press effect 3, the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed based on that the player who saw the button image ZF6 presses the effect button 63. In this case, the decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at a position slightly above the reach line LN so as to be aligned with the decorative pattern 8C. In this figure, as for the decorative symbol 8R, "7 symbols" are stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(H), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, on the reach line LN, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach symbol that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is displayed. In this reach effect, the character CRZE makes various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

The decorative symbol button stop effect is performed in the same change. The decorative symbol button stop effect may be performed not for the same variation but for a plurality of variations. For example, in the decorative pattern button stop effect D, the button display effect 1, the button press effect 1 is the first variation, the button display effect 2, the button press effect 2 is the second variation, the button display effect 3, the button press effect 3 May be performed by the third variation. Further, the decorative symbol button stop effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a prefetch effect. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol button stop effect, the stop mode of the decorative symbol stopped in the button pressing effect 3 may be a chance (a chance up display) that the jackpot expectation level is improved.

[Modification]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, by pressing the effect button 63 once, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be stopped at the same time.
The decorative symbol button stop effect may be continuously performed with a plurality of fluctuations. For example, the decorative symbol button stop effect D may be performed in the first variation, the second variation, the third variation, and so on. In this case, the stop order suggestion display of the button images associated with the decorative pattern is replaced, and when the effect button 63 is pressed, the order of the decorative pattern to be stopped among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may be switched. Good. For example, in the first variation, the decorative pattern 8L is associated with the button image ZF4, the decorative pattern 8C is associated with the button image ZF5, the decorative pattern 8R is associated with the button image ZF6, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are associated with each other. The stop order is the decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern 8C, and the decorative pattern 8R. In the second variation, the decorative pattern 8C is associated with the button image ZF4, the decorative pattern 8R is associated with the button image ZF5, and the decorative pattern 8L is associated. The stop order of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be set in the order of the decorative pattern 8C→the decorative pattern 8R→the decorative pattern 8L in association with the button image ZF6.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the decorative design button stop production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, when the effect of displaying the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in a variable manner is performed, the effect of displaying the button image is performed, and thereafter, the effect button 63 is operated, At least one of the changing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the decorative pattern can be stopped changing by the player, the player can enjoy the changing effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are a group of decorative symbols each composed of a large number of decorative symbols, and the effect button 63 is operated to change the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At least one of the decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the decorative pattern can be stopped changing by the player, the player can enjoy the changing effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the decorative symbol button stop effects B to D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, the button image ZF1, the button image ZF2, and the button image ZF3 are displayed, and then the effect button 63 is operated. By doing so, one of the decorative design 8L and/or the decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the player can stop the decorative pattern from changing, the player can enjoy the changing effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the decorative symbol button stop effects B to D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, the button image ZF1, the button image ZF2, and the button image ZF3 are displayed, and then the effect button 63 is operated. By doing so, one of the decorative patterns 8L is stopped and displayed, and by further operating the effect button 63, one of the decorative patterns 8C is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the decorative pattern can be stopped changing by the player, one by one, so that the player can enjoy the changing effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the decorative symbol button stop effect D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed, the button image ZF4, the button image ZF5, and the button image ZF6 are displayed, and these button images suggest the stop order. The image is included, and each time the effect button 63 is operated, the variation of the decorative design associated with the button image including the stop order suggestive image is stopped in the order based on the stop order suggestive image. According to this configuration, in the state in which the stop order of the decorative symbols is known, the decorative symbols can be changed and stopped by the player one by one, so that the player can enjoy the variable effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZF-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and operation means operable by a player,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of variably displaying a plurality of decorative symbols,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a first operation means image representing the operation means,
The third display effect is an effect to stop and display at least one decorative symbol of the plurality of decorative symbols that is being variably displayed in the first display effect,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is being performed, and then the third display effect is performed by operating the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZF-1,
The plurality of decorative symbols include a first decorative symbol group and a second decorative symbol group,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, one of the first decorative symbol groups is stopped and displayed by operating the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZF-2,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a fifth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second operation means image representing the operation means,
The fifth display effect is an effect to stop and display at least one decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol group that is being variably displayed in the first display effect,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is being performed, and then the fifth display effect is performed by operating the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZF-3,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed. After the second display effect and the fourth display effect, the operation means is operated to perform the third display effect, and after the third display effect, the operation means is operated again. The fifth display effect is performed by being operated,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZF-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZF-4,
There is a case where a sixth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect of displaying a first stop order suggestive image and a second stop order suggestive image,
The first stop order suggestion image is associated with the first operation means image in the second display effect, and when the operation means is operated, the first of the plurality of decorative symbols It is an image that suggests that the decorative design of the decorative design group is stopped and displayed before the second decorative design group,
The second stop order suggestion image is associated with the second operation means image in the fourth display effect, and when the operation means is operated, the second of the plurality of decorative symbols is the second. It is an image suggesting that the decorative design of the decorative design group is stopped and displayed after the decorative design of the first decorative design group,
In the case where the combination effect includes the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect, and the sixth display effect. There is
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed when the second display effect and the fourth display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
The first operation means image is on the variation line of the first decorative symbol group. The second operation means image is on the variation line of the second decorative symbol group.
○ The stop order of the first decorative symbol group and the second decorative symbol group changes when the fluctuation changes.
○ The stop position of the decorative design of the first decorative design group and the decorative design of the second decorative design group is deviated from the reach line. The decorative design of the first decorative design group and the decorative design of the second decorative design group are the same design.
○ Combination production is performed during the pseudo-reproduction.
The stop display mode of the decorative design of the first decorative design group and the decorative design of the second decorative design group is a chance up mode.
○ It is carried out with the same fluctuation.

The icon display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 148 to 151. This icon display effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Icon display effect A]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect A. In the icon effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 148(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(B), icon appearance production is performed. In this icon appearance production, four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3 are displayed. The icon ZG1 includes a character “quasi” that suggests a pseudo-relational effect, and a first character. Icon ZG2 includes a character "SP" indicating a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. Icon ZG3 includes a character "winning" that suggests a big hit, and a third character different from the first character and the second character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(C), icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are effects that form the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(D), icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are effects that form a second formation from the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in an “H” shape with a space between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(E), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 arranged in the second formation is selected. In the figure, the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(F), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, on the reach line LN, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach symbol that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is displayed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG makes various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Icon display effect B]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect B. In the icon effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), icon appearance production is performed. In this icon appearance production, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) are displayed one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Appeared (displayed). The icon ZG1 includes a character “quasi” that suggests a pseudo-relational effect, and a first character. Icon ZG2 includes a character "SP" indicating a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. Icon ZG3 includes a character "winning" that suggests a big hit, and a third character different from the first character and the second character. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from the upper right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are effects that form the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape with a space between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(D), icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are effects that form a second formation from the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in an "H" shape with a space between the icons and a space between the icons. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(E), the icon withdrawal appearance is performed. In this icon leaving appearance, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in the second formation state are provided one by one outside the display device from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). This is an effect of leaving, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 leave. In the figure, the three icons ZG1 leave, and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 exit from the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(F), icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device appear again on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. In the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move on the back side (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, it is an effect of selecting one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have re-appeared in the icon re-emergence effect and that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed. Specifically, one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 re-appeared in the icon re-emergence effect when the player who has seen the button image ZG4 in the icon re-emergence effect depresses the effect button 63. Select. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. In the figure, the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(H), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, on the reach line LN, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach symbol that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is displayed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG makes various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Icon display effect C]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect C. In the icon effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), icon appearance production is performed. In this icon appearance production, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) are displayed one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Appeared (displayed). The icon ZG1 includes a character “quasi” that suggests a pseudo-relational effect, and a first character. Icon ZG2 includes a character "SP" indicating a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. Icon ZG3 includes a character "winning" that suggests a big hit, and a third character different from the first character and the second character. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from the upper right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are effects that form the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape so as to overlap with (adjacent to) the adjacent icon. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(D), icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are effects that form a second formation from the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in the “H” shape so as to overlap with (adjacent to) the adjacent icon. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(E), the icon withdrawal appearance is performed. In this icon leaving appearance, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in the second formation state are provided one by one outside the display device from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). This is an effect of leaving, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 leave. In the figure, the three icons ZG1 leave, and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 exit from the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(F), icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device appear again on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. In the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move on the back side (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, it is an effect of selecting one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have re-appeared in the icon re-emergence effect and that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed. Specifically, one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 re-appeared in the icon re-emergence effect when the player who has seen the button image ZG4 in the icon re-emergence effect depresses the effect button 63. Select. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. In the figure, the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(H), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, on the reach line LN, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach symbol that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is displayed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG makes various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Icon display effect D]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the icon display effect D. In the icon effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), icon appearance production is performed. In this icon appearance production, a plurality of icons (four icons ZG1, two icons ZG2, and one icon ZG3) are displayed one by one on the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). Appeared (displayed). The icon ZG1 includes a character “quasi” that suggests a pseudo-relational effect, and a first character. Icon ZG2 includes a character "SP" indicating a super reach effect and a second character different from the first character. Icon ZG3 includes a character "winning" that suggests a big hit, and a third character different from the first character and the second character. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 appear on the display screen 7a from the upper right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), icon formation effect 1 is performed. In this icon formation effect 1, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are effects that form the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in a circular shape so as to overlap with (adjacent to) the adjacent icon. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are moving (rotating) counterclockwise. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 may be moved clockwise, or may be moved so that the size of the formation (the diameter of the circle) increases while maintaining the circular shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), icon formation effect 2 is performed. In this icon formation effect 2, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are effects that form a second formation from the first formation. Specifically, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are arranged in the “H” shape so as to overlap with (adjacent to) the adjacent icon. At this time, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 may move (rotate) counterclockwise, or may move so as to increase the size of the formation while maintaining the H shape.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), the icon withdrawal appearance is performed. In this icon leaving appearance, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 in the second formation state are provided one by one outside the display device from the display device (main display device 7 (display screen 7a) or sub display device 10). This is an effect of leaving, and all of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 leave. In the figure, the three icons ZG1 leave, and the icon ZG1 is about to leave. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 exit from the upper right part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(F), icon reappearance effect is performed. In this icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have left the display device appear again on the display device. In this case, in the icon reappearance effect, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are enlarged from the right side of the display screen 7a and appear one by one on the display screen 7a, and move to the left side of the display screen 7a at low speed. In the icon reappearance effect, a button image ZG4 representing the effect button 63 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move on the back side (back side) of the button image ZG4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(G), an icon selection effect is performed. In this icon selection effect, it is an effect of selecting one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 that have re-appeared in the icon re-emergence effect and that moves the display screen 7a at a low speed. Specifically, one of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 re-appeared in the icon re-emergence effect when the player who has seen the button image ZG4 in the icon re-emergence effect depresses the effect button 63. Select. In this case, when the effect button 63 is pressed, the icon on the back side of the button image ZG4 (superimposed on the button image ZG4) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an icon may be randomly selected when the effect button 63 is pressed. In the figure, the icon ZG2 is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(H), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, on the reach line LN, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the reach symbol that the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed is displayed. In this reach effect, the character CRZG makes various effects. This character CRZG corresponds to the second character included in the icon ZG2.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Modification]
In the above-described icon display effect, each of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 includes a character and a character that suggests a subsequent development, but in addition to these, a jackpot expectation degree or the like may be added.
In the icon display effects B to D, the positions of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 that come into the display device at the time of the icon appearance effect are almost the same as the positions at which the icons leave the appearance, but they are different. Good.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of icon display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the icon display effect, after the effect of displaying the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG3 is performed in the icon appearance effect, the effect of forming the first formation by the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, ZG3 is performed, After that, the effect that the plurality of icons ZG, ZG2, and ZG3 form the second formation is performed. According to this configuration, since the plurality of icons form two formations in order, it is possible to improve the interest of the icon effect without getting tired of the icon effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the icon display effects B to D, a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 appear one by one in the icon appearance effect, and a plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 are displayed. According to this configuration, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 can be recognized one by one, so that the interest of the icon effect can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon display effect D, in the icon formation effect, the formation is formed such that the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 overlap each other. According to this configuration, the gap between the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 is suppressed, so that the outer shape of the formed formation can be easily recognized, and the interest of the icon effect can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the icon display effect D, in the icon formation effect, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, ZG3 move in the formation while forming the formation. According to this configuration, the formation formed by the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be moved, so that the interest of the formation effect can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the icon display effects B to D, the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 are formed on the display device (main display device 7 and sub display device 10) after the formation of icons, and then the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2 and ZG3 leave the display device one by one and exit from the display device. According to this configuration, the exit of the plurality of icons ZG1, ZG2, and ZG3 can be recognized one by one, so that the interest of the icon effect can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZG-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of icons,
The second display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons form a first formation,
The third display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons form a second formation,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZG-1,
The first display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons appear one by one on the display means from outside the display means and display the plurality of icons.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect ZG-1 or Aspect ZG-2,
In the second display effect or the third display effect, the plurality of icons form the formation so as to overlap each other,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-3,
In the second display effect or the third display effect, the plurality of icons move in the formation while forming the formation,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZG-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZG-1 to ZG-4,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the plurality of icons exit from the display means one by one outside the display means,
The combination effect may include the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
After the fourth display effect, the plurality of icons retreating out of the display means appear again one by one on the display means.
The icon that has exited outside the display means in the fourth display effect returns to the inside of the display means from the direction opposite to the exit direction. You may return from the same position as the exit position. In this case, the icon returning to the display means may be enlarged and displayed. Further, the operation means image representing the operation means may be displayed on the icon returned to the display means or on the variation line of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, an icon corresponding to the operation means image may be selected by operating the operation means, and an effect (such as reach effect using the icon character) may be performed.

The effect execution confirmation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155. The effect execution confirmation effects A to D can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect execution finalized effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the main display. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the display screen of the sub display device 10.

[Production execution finalization A]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution finalization effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 152(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(B), the notice image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance production, a production notice image PNG, which has a hexagonal shape and is internally written with “Continue”, is displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect preview image PNG suggests a pseudo-relational effect. Instead of “continue”, “NEXT” may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(C), the notice image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "2". Further, the effect preview image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(E), the execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation effect, the effect announcement image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3, and moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. At this time, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the background of the effect preview image PNG is red. At this time, the reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped by the special symbol "continuation". Here, the left effect design 8L is "2", the middle effect design 8C is "continue", and the right effect design 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(G), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(H), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".

[Performance execution confirmation production B]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution finalization effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(B), the notice image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance production, a production notice image PNG, which has a hexagonal shape and is internally written with “Continue”, is displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect preview image PNG suggests a pseudo-relational effect. Instead of “continue”, “NEXT” may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(C), the notice image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153(D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "2". Further, the effect preview image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(E), the notice image disappearance effect is executed. The notice image extinguishing effect is an effect that the effect notice image PNG disappears outside the screen of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153(F), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. This fixed stop effect (miss) is an effect of stopping the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display device 7a. Here, both the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are stopped at "2", and the middle effect design 8C is stopped at "1". It should be noted that the hold image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[Production execution confirmation production C]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the effect execution confirming effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(B), the notice image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance production, a production notice image PNG, which has a hexagonal shape and is internally written with “Continue”, is displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect preview image PNG suggests a pseudo-relational effect. Instead of “continue”, “NEXT” may be used.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(C), the notice image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "2". Further, the effect preview image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(E), the notice image disappearance effect is executed. The notice image extinguishing effect is an effect that the effect notice image PNG disappears outside the screen of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow YG3.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(F), a temporary stop effect is executed. In the temporary stop effect, the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped by the special symbol "continuation". Here, the left effect design 8L is "2", the middle effect design 8C is "continue", and the right effect design 8R is "2".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(G), the re-variation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again, and here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are variably displayed. ..
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(H), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "7".

[Performance execution confirmation production D]
FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the production execution finalization production D.
First, as shown in FIG. 155(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L, the middle effect design 8C, and the right effect design 8R are variably displayed. Here, the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R are in the retracted position (home position). The hold image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. The reserved image 9A is a reserved image corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, and here, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. There is. On the other hand, the hold image 9C is displayed on the display screen of the right sub display device 10R. The held image 9C corresponds to the current fluctuation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(B), the notice image appearance effect is executed. In this notice image appearance production, a production notice image PNG having a hexagonal shape and having "SP" written inside is displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect announcement image PNG suggests the SP reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(C), a notice image movement effect is executed. In this notice image movement effect, the effect notice image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow YG1.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155(D), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both stopped at "2". Further, the effect preview image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow YG2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(E), the execution confirmation effect is executed. In the execution confirmation effect, the effect announcement image PNG moves so as to roll in the area at the edge of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow YG3, and moves from the display screen 7a to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. At this time, on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the background of the effect preview image PNG is red. The reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.
Next, as shown in FIG. 155(F), the reach development effect is executed. In this reach development effect, the message image MSG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the message image MSG is “developed”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(G), a battle effect is executed. This battle effect is an effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the teammate character CRA wins here, the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases. In the battle effect, the image of the portion covered by the sub display device 10 among the images displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Here, the foot parts of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. Therefore, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(H), a fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. This fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the big hit array on the display device 7a. Here, all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped at "2". The reserved image 9A is displayed on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L. Further, the suspension image 9C disappears as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of production execution finalization production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, after the production notice image PNG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the production notice image PNG moves to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L to execute the production suggested by the production notice image PNG. Is determined (FIGS. 152(B) to (E) and FIGS. 155(B) to (E)). According to this configuration, since the direction of the production notice image PNG is frightening, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the effect notice image PNG on the display screen 7a, the area at the end of the display screen 7a is moved (FIGS. 152(C)(D), 153(C)(D). 154(C)(D) and 155(C)(D). According to this configuration, since the direction of the production notice image PNG is frightening, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect preview image PNG moves along a predetermined route on the display screen 7a (FIGS. 152(C)(D), 153(C)(D), 154(C). )(D), FIG. 155(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the behavior of the effect preview image PNG can be easily understood, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect is given using the effect preview image PNG for notifying an effect to be executed later (FIG. 152(B), FIG. 153(B), FIG. 154(B), FIG. 155(B). )). With this configuration, the effect to be executed later can be easily understood, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the notice image disappearing effect is executed in which the effect notice image PNG disappears to the outside of the display screen 7a without moving to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 153(E )), As a general rule, the non-execution of the effect suggested by the effect preview image PNG is determined. According to this configuration, since the direction of the production notice image PNG is frightening, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the production notice image PNG is moved to the display screen of the left sub display device 10L, the background of the production notice image PNG becomes red on the display screen of the left sub display device 10L (FIG. 152 ( E), FIG. 155(E)). With this configuration, it is easy to understand the confirmation of the execution of the effect suggested by the effect preview image PNG, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Modification]
The following is a modified example of the effect execution confirmation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the production notice image PNG that suggests the production to be executed later is used, but an image that is not directly related to the subsequent production (for example, a message image such as “Gekiatsu”) may be used.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the production notice image PNG moves along a predetermined route on the display screen 7a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the effect preview image is an image like a balloon, the display screen 7a may be fluffy.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
A first display device capable of displaying an image and performing an effect;
A game machine having a second display device different from the first display device,
Execution of the specific effect is determined by displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device and then moving the predetermined image from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device. A gaming machine characterized by.

[Aspect E2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
A game machine characterized by moving the predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device after displaying the predetermined image on the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined image moves along a predetermined route of the display screen of the first display device.

[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined image is a notice image for giving notice of the execution of the specific effect.

[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4,
A game machine characterized in that, if the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device, the non-execution of the specific effect is determined in principle.

[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5,
A game machine characterized in that, when the predetermined image moves from the display screen of the first display device to the display screen of the second display device, execution confirmation effect is performed on the display screen of the second display device.

[Aspect E2-7]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-6,
It is possible to display a hold image corresponding to the hold storage using the display screen of the second display device,
The game machine, wherein the held image is displayed on a display device other than the second display device while the execution confirmation effect is being executed.

[Aspect E2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-7,
The game machine characterized in that execution of the specific effect may be determined even when the predetermined image does not move from the first display device to the second display device.

Reach development selection effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 156 to 159. This reach development selection effect may be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Reach development selection production A]
FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect A. In the reach development selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 156(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(B), reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed of three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH1, reach effect selection area ZH2, and reach effect selection area ZH3) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 are circular and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH1 includes the characters “A reach”. The character "A reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH1 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH2 includes the characters “B reach”. The character "B reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH2 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH3 includes the characters “C reach”. The character "C reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH3 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(C), reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second area formed from three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH1A, reach effect selection area ZH2A, and reach effect selection area ZH3A) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, and ZH3A have a rectangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, ZH3A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 of the first area, respectively, and are larger than the corresponding reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3. Therefore, the second area is larger than the first area. The reach effect selection area ZH1A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH1 of the first area, and includes the character “A reach”. The character "A reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH1A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH2A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH2 of the first area, and includes the characters “B reach”. The character "B reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The reach effect selection area ZH3A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH3 of the first area, and includes the character “C reach”. The character "C reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH3A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(D), reach determination effect is performed. This reach determination effect is an effect of determining (selecting) one area from the second areas. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH2A is indicated by hatching, and the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the reach line LN with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure), and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH makes various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Reach development selection production B]
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect B. In the reach development selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 157(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(B), reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed of three reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH4, reach effect selection area ZH5, and reach effect selection area ZH6) is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, ZH6 are circular and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH4 includes the characters "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH4 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation degree, which means that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH5 includes a character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" indicates that B reach is performed in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH5 is selected. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH6 includes a character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" indicates that C reach is performed in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH6 is selected. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(C), reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH4A, reach effect selection area ZH5A, reach effect selection area ZH6A, and reach effect selection area ZH7A) is displayed. .. The reach effect selection areas ZH4A, ZH5A, ZH6A are quadrangular and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection areas ZH4A, ZH5A, ZH6A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, ZH6 of the first area, respectively, and are larger than the corresponding reach effect selection areas ZH4, ZH5, ZH6. Therefore, the second area is larger than the first area. The reach effect selection area ZH4A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH4 of the first area, and includes the characters "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH4A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation degree, which means that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH5A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH5 of the first area, and includes the characters "B reach", the second character, and the two star marks. The character "B reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH5A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. The reach effect selection area ZH6A includes a character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH6A is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. Reach effect selection area ZH7A includes a character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" indicates that D reach is performed in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH7A is selected. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(D), reach determination effect is performed. This reach determination effect is an effect of determining (selecting) one area from the second areas. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH2A is indicated by hatching, and the reach effect selection area ZH2A is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed as the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH that is the second character included in the reach effect selection area ZH5A determined by the reach determination effect gives various effects.
After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Reach development selection production C]
FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect C. In the reach development selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 158(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(B), reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH8, reach effect selection area ZH9, reach effect selection area ZH10, and reach effect selection area ZH11) is displayed. .. The reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 have a triangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH8 includes the characters "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH8 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation degree, which means that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9 includes a character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH9 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. Reach effect selection area ZH10 includes a character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH10 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11 includes a character “E reach”, a fifth character, and four star marks. The character "E reach" indicates that E reach is performed in the reach production when the reach production selection area ZH11 is selected. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively higher than that of the three star marks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(C), reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second reach effect selection area (reach effect selection area ZH8A, reach effect selection area ZH9A, reach effect selection area ZH10A, reach effect selection area ZH11A, and reach effect selection area ZH12A) is formed. Area is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, ZH11A are trapezoidal and are arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the reach effect selection area ZH12A has a rhombus shape and is arranged substantially at the center of the reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, ZH11A. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, ZH11A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, ZH11 of the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R, respectively, and thus have the same size. The reach effect selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes the characters "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH8A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation degree, which means that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes the characters "B reach", the second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH9A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. Reach effect selection area ZH10A includes a character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" indicates that C reach is performed in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH10A is selected. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11A includes a character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The character “E reach” indicates that E reach is performed in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH11A is selected. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation degree, which means that the jackpot expectation degree is higher than that of the three star marks. Reach effect selection area ZH12A includes a character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected, D reach is performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is extremely high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(D), reach determination effect is performed. This reach determination effect is an effect of determining (selecting) one area from the second areas. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH12A is indicated by hatching, and the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH1, which is the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A determined in the reach determination effect, makes various effects. After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.

[Reach development selection production D]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the reach development selection effect D. In the reach development selection effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 159(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), reach selection effect 1 is performed. In this reach selection effect 1, a first area formed from four reach effect selection areas (reach effect selection area ZH8, reach effect selection area ZH9, reach effect selection area ZH10, and reach effect selection area ZH11) is displayed. .. The reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, and ZH11 have a triangular shape and are arranged adjacent to each other. The reach effect selection area ZH8 includes the characters "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH8 is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation degree, which means that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9 includes a character "B reach", a second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH9 is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. Reach effect selection area ZH10 includes a character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH10 is selected, C reach is performed in the reach effect. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11 includes a character “E reach”, a fifth character, and four star marks. The character "E reach" indicates that E reach is performed in the reach production when the reach production selection area ZH11 is selected. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively higher than that of the three star marks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(C), reach selection effect 2 is performed. In this reach selection effect 2, a second reach effect selection area (reach effect selection area ZH8A, reach effect selection area ZH9A, reach effect selection area ZH10A, reach effect selection area ZH11A, and reach effect selection area ZH12A) is formed. Area is displayed. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, ZH11A are trapezoidal and are arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the reach effect selection area ZH12A has a rhombus shape and is arranged substantially at the center of the reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, ZH11A. The reach effect selection areas ZH8A, ZH9A, ZH10A, ZH11A correspond to the reach effect selection areas ZH8, ZH9, ZH10, ZH11 of the first area, respectively. The first area and the second area correspond to the entire areas of the display screen 7a, the left sub display device 10L, and the right sub display device 10R, respectively, and thus have the same size. The reach effect selection area ZH8A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH8 of the first area, and includes the characters "A reach", the first character, and one star mark. The character "A reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH8A is selected, A reach is performed in the reach effect. One star mark represents the jackpot expectation degree, which means that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. The reach effect selection area ZH9A is an area corresponding to the reach effect selection area ZH9 of the first area, and includes the characters "B reach", the second character, and two star marks. The character "B reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH9A is selected, B reach is performed in the reach effect. The two star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively medium. Reach effect selection area ZH10A includes a character "C reach", a third character, and three star marks. The character "C reach" indicates that C reach is performed in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH10A is selected. The three star marks represent the jackpot expectation, which means that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. The reach effect selection area ZH11A includes a character "E reach", a fifth character, and four star marks. The character “E reach” indicates that E reach is performed in the reach effect when the reach effect selection area ZH11A is selected. The four star marks represent the jackpot expectation degree, which means that the jackpot expectation degree is higher than that of the three star marks. Reach effect selection area ZH12A includes a character "D reach", a fourth character, and five star marks. The character "D reach" indicates that when the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected, D reach is performed in the reach effect. The five star marks represent the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is extremely high. Further, the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A has advanced to the reach effect selection area ZH8A and the reach effect selection area ZH9A that are adjacent to the reach effect selection area ZH12A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(D), reach determination effect is performed. This reach determination effect is an effect of determining (selecting) one area from the second areas. In the figure, the reach effect selection area ZH12A is indicated by hatching, and the reach effect selection area ZH12A is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(E), in this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols in the figure) on the reach line LN, and the decorative symbol 8C changes at high speed. Reach display is performed. In this reach effect, the character CRZH1, which is the fourth character included in the reach effect selection area ZH12A determined in the reach determination effect, makes various effects. After this reach effect, a lost symbol display and a jackpot symbol display are performed.
The reach development selection effects A to D are performed in the same change.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of reach development selection production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the above-mentioned reach development selection effect, the first area formed by the plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and thereafter, the second area formed by the plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, ZH3A. The area is displayed. According to this configuration, two areas including different reach effect selection areas are displayed in order, so that the player can be given a sense of excitement when the reach is selected. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned reach development selection effect, the first area formed by the plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1, ZH2, ZH3 is displayed, and thereafter, the second area formed by the plurality of reach effect selection areas ZH1A, ZH2A, ZH3A. An area is displayed, and the first area and the second area have the same size. According to this configuration, since two areas having different reach selection areas and having the same size are sequentially displayed, the plurality of reach selection areas are selected in the first area and the second area. It is possible to make it easier to recognize the difference between the areas, and to give the player a sense of excitement when the reach is selected. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the reach development/selection effect, each of the plurality of reach effect selection areas is an area including a jackpot expectation degree suggesting image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree. According to this configuration, the player can be given more excitement when the reach is selected. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the reach development selection effect, the plurality of reach effect selection areas are areas each including a character image. According to this configuration, the player can be given more excitement when the reach is selected. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the reach development selection effect D, the character image included in the predetermined reach effect selection area has advanced to another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach effect selection area. According to this configuration, the character included in the predetermined reach selection area can be made conspicuous, and when the predetermined reach selection area is selected, a great excitement can be given to the player. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZH-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas,
The second display effect is an effect for displaying a second area including a plurality of reach effect selection areas,
The reach effect selection area is an area including a reach effect suggestion image that suggests development to a predetermined reach effect,
There are cases where a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect is performed,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZH-1,
The first region and the second region have the same size,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect ZH-1 or Aspect ZH-2,
The reach production selection region is a region including a jackpot expectation degree suggesting image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects ZH-1 to ZH-3,
The reach effect selection area is an area including a character image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZH-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZH-4,
The character image included in a predetermined reach selection area has advanced to another reach selection area adjacent to the predetermined reach selection area,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
The second area has more reach selection areas than the first area.
The size of each reach selection area of the second area and each corresponding reach selection area in the first area (the reach selection area including the same reach effect suggestion image as the reach selection area of the first area) are Or the shape is different.
The specific reach selection area in the second area and the corresponding reach selection area in the first area (the reach selection area including the same reach effect suggestion image as the reach selection area in the first area) are the jackpot expectation levels. , The character image does not change.
○ In the reach effect, the character image of the selected reach selection area appears.

The two-way group effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163. This two-way group effect can be executed during the effect of changing the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Bidirectional group production A]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect A. In the two-way group effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 160(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(B), an icon group display effect is performed. In this icon group display effect, the first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 which are icon images is displayed in the left side area of the display screen 7a, and the formation is moved to the right side area of the display screen 7a to be displayed on the display screen 7a. Disappears outside. The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. In the icon group display effect, the first group image is displayed on the left side area of the display screen 7a, and the respective heart images ZI1 are moving at relatively different speeds without being in the formation, and the first group image is displayed on the display screen 7a. You may move to the right side area|region and it may make it disappear outside the display screen 7a. Further, a circular icon image may be used as the icon image instead of the heart image ZI1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), a character group display effect is performed. In this character group display effect, a second group image including a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2, which are character images, is displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a, and the formation is moved to the left side area of the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is displayed. Disappears outside. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. In the character group display effect, the second group image is displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a, and each of the Niconico images ZI2 is moving at a relatively different speed while remaining in the formation, and the second group image is displayed on the display screen 7a. You may move to the right side area|region and it may make it disappear outside the display screen 7a. Further, instead of the Niconico image ZI2, a character image that imitates the whole body wearing a battle uniform may be used as the character image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(D), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, a character image CRZI obtained by enlarging the Nico Nico image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Bidirectional group production B]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect B. In the two-way group effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 161(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(B), group display effect 1 is performed. In this group display effect 1, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 that are icon images is displayed in the left side area of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2 that are character images are displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a. And then the first group image moves in the first direction (direction toward the right side area of the display screen 7a, that is, right direction), and the second group image moves in the opposite direction to the first direction. In the second direction (direction toward the left side area of the display screen 7a, that is, left direction). The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has low transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. Niconico image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move in a certain formation when moving. Without being limited to this, when the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. Further, when the second group image (a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. A circular icon image may be used as the icon image instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, instead of the Niconico image ZI2, a character image that imitates the whole body wearing a battle uniform may be used as the character image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(C), group display effect 2 is performed. In the group display effect 2, after the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move, they overlap each other near the center of the display screen 7a. , The first group image moves in the first direction as it is, disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a, and the second group image moves in the second direction as it is, It disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiley image ZI2. Therefore, since the heart image ZI1 has low transparency, when the heart image ZI1 is present before the happy image ZI2, the happy image ZI2 is hidden by the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the happy image ZI2 overlap, the happy image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. In this case, when the happy image ZI2 precedes the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 is hidden by the happy image ZI2. In addition, in this group display effect 2, the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) pass each other without overlapping in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. You may do it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(D), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, a character image CRZI obtained by enlarging the Nico Nico image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Bidirectional group performance C]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect C. In the two-way group effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 162(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(B), group display effect 1 is performed. In this group display effect 1, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 that are icon images is displayed in the left side area of the display screen 7a, and a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2 that are character images are displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a. And then the first group image moves in the first direction (direction toward the right side area of the display screen 7a, that is, right direction), and the second group image moves in the opposite direction to the first direction. In the second direction (direction toward the left side area of the display screen 7a, that is, left direction). The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. The smiling image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move in a certain formation when moving. Without being limited to this, when the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. Further, when the second group image (a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. A circular icon image may be used as the icon image instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, instead of the Niconico image ZI2, a character image that imitates the whole body wearing a battle uniform may be used as the character image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(C), group display effect 2 is performed. In the group display effect 2, after the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move, they overlap each other near the center of the display screen 7a. , The first group image moves in the first direction as it is, disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a, and the second group image moves in the second direction as it is, It disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiley image ZI2. However, since the heart image ZI1 has high transparency, even if there is the heart image ZI1 before the Niconico image ZI2, the Niconico image ZI2 can be visually recognized through the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the happy image ZI2 overlap, the happy image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. The heart image ZI1 may have low transparency, and the happy image ZI2 may have high transparency. In this case, when the happy image ZI2 is present before the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 becomes visible through the happy image ZI2. In addition, in this group display effect 2, the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) pass each other without overlapping in the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. You may do it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(D), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, a character image CRZI obtained by enlarging the Nico Nico image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.

[Bidirectional group production D]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the two-way group effect D. In the two-way group effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 163(A), decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(B), group display effect 1 is performed. In this group display effect 1, a first group image including a plurality of heart images ZI1 that are icon images is displayed on the left side area of the display screen 7a and the left sub display device 10L, and a plurality of Niconico images ZI2 that are character images are displayed. The first group image is displayed in the right side area of the display screen 7a, and then the first group image moves in the first direction (direction toward the right side area of the display screen 7a, that is, right direction), and the second group image becomes the first group image. The second direction (the direction toward the left side area of the display screen 7a, that is, the left direction), which is the opposite direction to the direction of, is moved. The heart image ZI1 is a heart-shaped icon image. The heart image ZI1 has high transparency. The smiling image ZI2 is a character image that imitates a smiling face. The smiling image ZI2 has low transparency. In this case, in the group display effect 1, the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) move in a certain formation when moving. Without being limited to this, when the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) moves, each heart image ZI1 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. Further, when the second group image (a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) moves, each Nico Nico image ZI2 may move at a relatively different speed instead of a constant formation. A circular icon image may be used as the icon image instead of the heart image ZI1. Further, instead of the Niconico image ZI2, a character image that imitates the whole body wearing a battle uniform may be used as the character image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(C), group display effect 2 is performed. In this group display effect 2, the first group image (a plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (a plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) are moved, so that the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a and the left sub display device are displayed. After overlapping with 10L and the right sub display device 10R, the first group image moves in the first direction as it is, disappears from the right edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a, and then the second group image. The group image of No. moves in the second direction as it is, and disappears from the left edge of the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. When the heart image ZI1 and the smiley image ZI2 overlap, the heart image ZI1 is displayed in front of the smiley image ZI2. However, since the heart image ZI1 has high transparency, even if there is the heart image ZI1 before the Niconico image ZI2, the Niconico image ZI2 can be visually recognized through the heart image ZI1. When the heart image ZI1 and the happy image ZI2 overlap, the happy image ZI2 may be displayed in front of the heart image ZI1. The heart image ZI1 may have low transparency, and the happy image ZI2 may have high transparency. In this case, when the happy image ZI2 is present before the heart image ZI1, the heart image ZI1 becomes visible through the happy image ZI2. Further, in this group display effect 2, the first group image (the plurality of heart images ZI1) and the second group image (the plurality of Nico Nico images ZI2) may not pass each other but may pass each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(D), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (7 symbols), and the reach display showing the reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates is performed. In the reach effect, a character image CRZI obtained by enlarging the Nico Nico image ZI2 is displayed, and a predetermined action is performed on the display screen 7a by the character image CRZI. In this reach effect, a predetermined action may be performed using the heart image ZI1.
The two-direction group effects A to D are performed in the same change.

[Modification]
In the two-direction group effect, the first group image moves in the first direction (right direction), and the second group image moves in the second direction (left direction) opposite to the first direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first group image and the second group image may be moved in different directions different from the opposite directions. For example, the first group image may move upward and the second group image may move leftward.
In the above-described two-way group effect, the first group image is formed of the icon image and the second group image is formed of the character image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first group image and the first group image are formed. The second group image may be formed of an icon image, the first group image and the second group image may be formed of a character image, the first group image and the first group image, and The second group image may be formed by an image other than the icon image or the character image.
In the two-way group effect, a predetermined image may be displayed on the illumination panel 18 when the character group display effect, the group display effect 1, or the group display effect 2 is performed. In this case, the predetermined image on the illumination panel 18 visually displays the first group image and/or the second group image. For example, in the illumination panel 18, the predetermined image may be displayed while avoiding the area corresponding to the area where the first group image and the second group image overlap on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of two-way group production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the two-direction group effect, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed and the second group image including the plurality of smiling Nico images ZI2 is displayed in the same change. According to this configuration, since two group images are displayed in the same variation, it is possible to make the group production more exciting and improve the interest of the group production. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the two-direction group effect, the second group image including the plurality of smiling Nico images ZI2 is displayed when the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 is displayed in the same change. According to this configuration, since two group effects are simultaneously performed in the same variation, the group effects can be excited and the interest of the group effects can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the two-direction group effect, in the same change, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in the first direction, and the second group image including the plurality of smiling images ZI2 becomes the first direction. Move in a different second direction. According to this configuration, since the two group images move in different directions in the same change, the group effect can be dynamically and gorgeously performed, and the interest of the group effect can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the two-direction group effect, in the same change, the first group image including the plurality of heart images ZI1 moves in the first direction, and the second group image including the plurality of smiling images ZI2 becomes the first direction. Moves in a second, opposite direction. According to this configuration, since two group images relatively move toward or away from each other in the same variation, group production can be performed dynamically and brilliantly, and interest in group production can be improved. You can As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the two-direction group effect, the heart image ZI1 of the first group image is an icon image and the Niconico image ZI2 of the second group image is a character image. According to this configuration, since group effects are performed by group images of different categories in the same variation, the group effects can be performed brilliantly and the interest of the group effects can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZI-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a display in which a first group image including a plurality of images moves.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a display in which a second group image including a plurality of images moves.
There are cases where a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect is performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same change.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZI-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed in the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZI-2,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first group image moves in a first direction, and in the second display effect, the second group image changes in the first direction. Move in a second direction different from,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZI-3,
The first direction is opposite to the second direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZI-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZI-4,
The plurality of images of the first group image are icon images,
The plurality of images of the second group image are character images,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
The first group image and the second group image overlap. A plurality of images of one group image are provided with a transmissive part which at least one part permeates. The plurality of images of the second group image may also include the transmissive portion.
The reach effect is performed by using the images (for example, the icon image and the character image) that form the first group image or the second group image.
The first group image and the second group image pass through the main display device and the sub display device. The first group image is generated from the main display device, and the second group image is generated from the sub display device.
The third display device is provided in the front, and the first group image and the second group image can be seen through the gap between the display images.

The obtained payout display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 164 to 167. The obtained payout display effect may be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to display the display screen 7a. , The left sub display device 10L, the right sub display device 10R, the illumination panel 18 and the like are effects to display an image. The illumination panel 18 is a transparent display panel, and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the display screen 7a and the sub display device 10.

[Winning ball display effect A]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the obtained payout display effect A. In the obtained payout display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 164(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot design display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot designs. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(C), a production effect of displaying the expected number of balls is performed. In this planned production number display plan, an expected production number display ZJ1, an expected production number display ZJ2, an expected production number display ZJ3, and an expected production number display ZJ4 are displayed. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1 is represented by the character “+15”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “15”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ2 is represented by the character “+105”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “105”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ3 is represented by the character “+150”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “150”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is represented by the character "+300", which indicates that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". These expected number-of-acquired-balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are displayed in the same mode when the same number of acquired balls is displayed, and are displayed in different modes when different numbers of acquired balls are displayed. In this case, the “same aspect” means, for example, the same color and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. In addition, the “different aspect” is, for example, that the color and/or the pattern and/or the size and/or the shape and/or the font are different. Further, in the expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. In addition, in the effect of displaying the expected number of balls to be acquired, the sizes of the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be made larger as the display representing the larger number of acquired balls is increased. For example, it is displayed such that the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ4 is the largest, the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ3 is the next largest, the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ2 is the largest, and the planned acquisition number of balls display ZJ1 is the smallest. May be. In the figure, various hatchings are used to show that the colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(D), the maximum expected number of balls display effect is performed. In the maximum expected planned number of balls display effect, the maximum planned planned number of balls display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum expected planned number of balls display ZJ5 represents the maximum planned planned number of balls in the jackpot game. The maximum expected number of balls displayed by the maximum expected number of balls display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the expected number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned planned number of earned balls display effect, or acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum expected planned number of balls display ZJ5 is shown as "MAX 2000", which suggests that the maximum planned planned number of balls in the jackpot game is 2000. Further, in the maximum expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.
From the decorative pattern variation effect to the maximum expected number of balls display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(E), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This big hit game display effect is performed during the big hit game, and the big hit payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. The payout winning display ZJ6 represents the number of balls (number of paid-out balls) obtained in the jackpot game (150 in the figure) and the maximum expected number of balls (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it represents one round. The character image CRZJ gives various effects during the big hit game. In the jackpot game display effect, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

[Winning ball display effect B]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the obtained payout display effect B. In the winning payout display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 165(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot design display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot designs. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(C), a production effect of displaying the expected number of balls is performed. In this planned production number display plan, an expected production number display ZJ1, an expected production number display ZJ2, an expected production number display ZJ3, and an expected production number display ZJ4 are displayed. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1 is represented by the character “+15”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “15”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ2 is represented by the character “+105”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “105”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ3 is represented by the character “+150”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “150”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is represented by the character "+300", which indicates that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". These expected number-of-acquired-balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are displayed in the same mode when the same number of acquired balls is displayed, and are displayed in different modes when different numbers of acquired balls are displayed. In this case, the “same aspect” means, for example, the same color and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. In addition, the “different aspect” is, for example, that the color and/or the pattern and/or the size and/or the shape and/or the font are different. Further, in the expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. In addition, in the effect of displaying the expected number of balls to be acquired, the sizes of the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be made larger as the display representing the larger number of acquired balls is increased. For example, it is displayed such that the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ4 is the largest, the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ3 is the next largest, the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ2 is the largest, and the planned acquisition number of coins display ZJ1 is the smallest. May be. In the figure, various hatchings are used to show that the colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(D), a display effect of enlarging the expected number of balls is performed. In this enlarged planned number-of-acquired-balls enlarged display effect, the planned number-of-acquired-balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is moved (moved) and enlarged. Further, in the expected number of balls enlarged display effect, a jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(E), the effect of displaying the maximum expected number of balls is performed. In the maximum expected planned number of balls display effect, the maximum planned planned number of balls display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum expected planned number of balls display ZJ5 represents the maximum planned planned number of balls in the jackpot game. The maximum expected number of balls displayed by this maximum expected number of balls display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the expected number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned planned number of earned balls display effect, or acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum expected planned number of balls display ZJ5 is shown as “MAX 2000”, which suggests that the maximum planned planned number of balls in the jackpot game is 2000. Further, in the maximum expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.
From the decorative pattern variation effect to the maximum expected number of balls display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(F), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This big hit game display effect is performed during the big hit game, and the big hit payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. The payout winning display ZJ6 represents the number of balls (number of paid-out balls) obtained in the jackpot game (150 in the figure) and the maximum expected number of balls (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it represents one round. The character image CRZJ gives various effects during the big hit game. Further, in the expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

[Winning ball display effect C]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the obtained payout display effect C. In the obtained payout display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 166(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot design display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot designs. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(C), a production effect of displaying the expected number of balls is performed. In this planned production number display plan, an expected production number display ZJ1, an expected production number display ZJ2, an expected production number display ZJ3, and an expected production number display ZJ4 are displayed. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1 is represented by the character “+15”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “15”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ2 is represented by the character “+105”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “105”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ3 is represented by the character “+150”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “150”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is represented by the character "+300", which indicates that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". These expected number-of-acquired-balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are displayed in the same mode when the same number of acquired balls is displayed, and are displayed in different modes when different numbers of acquired balls are displayed. In this case, the “same aspect” means, for example, the same color and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. Further, the “different aspect” is, for example, that the color and/or the pattern and/or the size and/or the shape and/or the font are different. Further, in the expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. In addition, in the effect of displaying the expected number of balls to be acquired, the sizes of the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be set to be larger as the display representing the larger number of acquired balls is increased. For example, it is displayed such that the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ4 is the largest, the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ3 is the next largest, the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ2 is the largest, and the planned acquisition number of balls display ZJ1 is the smallest. May be. In the figure, various hatchings are used to represent the different colors and patterns of the expected number-of-goals display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(D), a display effect of enlarging the expected number of balls is performed. In this enlarged planned number-of-acquired-balls enlarged display effect, the planned number-of-acquired-balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is moved (moved) and enlarged. Further, in the expected number of balls enlarged display effect, a jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(E), a display effect of reducing the number of balls to be acquired is performed. This planned acquisition number reduction display effect is an effect of reducing the acquisition target number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 while moving (moving) toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a). .. Further, in the expected number of balls enlarged display effect, a jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. It should be noted that, although the planned acquisition number of balls reduction display effect of FIG. 166(E) is performed after the planned acquisition number expansion display effect of FIG. 166(D), the invention is not limited to this, and the planned acquisition ball number acquisition of FIG. 166(E) is performed. 166(D) may be performed after the number reduction display effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(F), the effect of displaying the maximum expected number of balls is performed. In the maximum expected planned number of balls display effect, the maximum planned planned number of balls display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum expected planned number of balls display ZJ5 represents the maximum planned planned number of balls in the jackpot game. The maximum expected number of balls displayed by the maximum expected number of balls display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the expected number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned planned number of earned balls display effect, or acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum expected planned number of balls display ZJ5 is shown as "MAX 2000", which suggests that the maximum planned planned number of balls in the jackpot game is 2000. Further, in the maximum expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.
From the decorative pattern variation effect to the maximum expected number of balls display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(G), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This big hit game display effect is performed during the big hit game, and the big hit payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. The payout winning display ZJ6 represents the number of balls (number of paid-out balls) obtained in the jackpot game (150 in the figure) and the maximum expected number of balls (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it represents one round. The character image CRZJ gives various effects during the big hit game. Further, in the expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

[Don't win display effect D]
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the obtained payout display effect D. In the obtained payout display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 167(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the left sub display device 10L and the right sub display device 10R. These holding icons 9A and 9C are white holding icons without a pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(B), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot design display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed as jackpot designs. In this figure, "7 7 7" is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern. When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, various effects are performed by a predetermined character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(C), a production effect of displaying the expected number of balls is performed. In this planned production number display, the planned production number display ZJ1, the planned production number display ZJ2, the planned production number display ZJ3, and the planned production number display ZJ4 are displayed while moving and overlapping each other. It The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1 is represented by the character “+15”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “15”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ2 is represented by the character “+105”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “105”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ3 is represented by the character “+150”, which suggests that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by “150”. The expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ4 is represented by the character "+300", which indicates that the number of expected balls to be acquired in the jackpot game has increased by "300". These expected number-of-acquired-balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are displayed in the same mode when the same number of acquired balls is displayed, and are displayed in different modes when different numbers of acquired balls are displayed. In this case, the “same aspect” means, for example, the same color and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font. In addition, the “different aspect” is, for example, that the color and/or the pattern and/or the size and/or the shape and/or the font are different. Further, in the expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. In addition, in the effect of displaying the expected number of balls to be acquired, the sizes of the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 may be made larger as the display representing the larger number of acquired balls is increased. For example, it is displayed such that the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ4 is the largest, the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ3 is the next largest, the planned acquisition number of coins ZJ2 is the largest, and the planned acquisition number of balls display ZJ1 is the smallest. May be. In the figure, various hatchings are used to show that the colors and patterns of the expected number of balls to be acquired display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(D), a display effect of enlarging the expected number of balls is performed. In the enlarged planned number-of-acquired-balls display effect, the planned number-of-acquired-balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 overlaps with each other while moving and expanding. Further, in the expected number of balls enlarged display effect, a jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(E), a display effect of reducing the number of balls to be acquired is performed. In this planned production number reduction display effect, the planned production number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 are moved and reduced toward a predetermined position (near the center of the display screen 7a) while overlapping each other. Further, in the expected number of balls enlarged display effect, a jackpot symbol is displayed on the right sub display device 10R. It should be noted that although the planned acquisition number reduction display effect of FIG. 167(E) is performed after the planned acquisition number expansion display effect of FIG. 167(D), the present invention is not limited to this and the acquisition target ball acquisition plan of FIG. 167(E) is not limited to this. 167(D) may be performed after the number reduction display effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(F), the effect of displaying the maximum expected number of balls is performed. In the maximum expected planned number of balls display effect, the maximum planned planned number of balls display ZJ5 is displayed. The maximum expected planned number of balls display ZJ5 represents the maximum planned planned number of balls in the jackpot game. The maximum expected number of balls displayed by the maximum expected number of balls display ZJ5 is the same as the total value of the expected number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 displayed in the above-mentioned planned number of earned balls display effect, or acquired. It is larger than the total value of the planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. In the figure, the maximum expected planned number of balls display ZJ5 is shown as "MAX 2000", which suggests that the maximum planned planned number of balls in the jackpot game is 2000. Further, in the maximum expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.
From the decorative pattern variation effect to the maximum expected number of balls display effect, the same variation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(G), a jackpot game display effect is performed. This big hit game display effect is performed during the big hit game, and the big hit payout acquisition display ZJ6, the round display ZJ7, and the character image CRZJ are displayed. The payout winning display ZJ6 represents the number of balls (number of paid-out balls) obtained in the jackpot game (150 in the figure) and the maximum expected number of balls (2000 in the figure). The round display ZJ7 represents the number of rounds of the round game. In the figure, it represents one round. The character image CRZJ gives various effects during the big hit game. Further, in the expected number of balls display effect, a jackpot pattern is displayed on the right sub display device 10R.

[Modification]
In the above winning payout display effect, the decorative pattern variation effect to the maximum expected number of balls display effect is performed with the same variation, and the jackpot game display effect is performed during the jackpot game, but is not limited to this, and the expected number of balls to be won You may make it perform a display effect, an expansion display number of acquisition planned balls display effect, a reduction display number of acquisition planned balls display effect, and a display effect of maximum planned acquisition number of balls during a jackpot game.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the obtained payout display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the above-mentioned acquisition payout display effect, after the effect of displaying the jackpot pattern and informing of the jackpot is performed, the effect of displaying a plurality of expected number of balls ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is performed, and then the maximum winning is achieved. The effect of displaying the planned number of balls ZJ5 is performed, and then the jackpot game effect is performed. According to this configuration, after the planned number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 can be used to recognize the number of balls to be acquired in the jackpot game in small pieces, the maximum planned number of balls to be displayed ZJ5 is set to the maximum number in the jackpot game. Since it is possible to recognize the expected number of balls to be acquired, it is possible to enjoy a great pleasure after a small pleasure and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above-mentioned obtained payout number display effect, when an effect of performing a plurality of expected planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is performed, the same number of balls is selected from the plurality of expected planned number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. The displayed expected number-of-balls display is displayed in the same manner (for example, the same color and/or pattern, and/or size, and/or shape, and/or font). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize the display of the expected number of balls having the same expected number of balls in the expected number of balls to be obtained ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. It becomes easier to find the number display, and the interest of the display effect related to the expected number of balls can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-mentioned acquisition payout number display effect, when the effect of performing a plurality of expected acquisition number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is performed, a different number of balls is selected from the plurality of expected acquisition number display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. The expected number-of-goals-to-be-displayed is displayed in a different manner (for example, different in color and/or pattern and/or size and/or shape and/or font). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to recognize the display of the expected number of balls having the same expected number of balls in the expected number of balls to be obtained ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4. It becomes easier to find the number display, and the interest of the display effect related to the expected number of balls can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the above-mentioned acquired payout display effect, an effect of enlarging a plurality of expected number-of-acquired-balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 is performed before the jackpot game effect. According to this configuration, the expected number of balls display ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4 are emphasized, so that it becomes easier to recognize the expected number of balls display that is displayed more and more, and the enjoyment of the display effect related to the number of acquired balls is improved. Can be made As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-mentioned acquisition payout display effect, before the jackpot game effect, after performing an effect of reducing the plurality of expected acquisition ball number displays ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, ZJ4 to predetermined positions, the maximum expected acquisition number display ZJ5 is performed. According to this configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize the expected number of balls to be acquired ZJ1, ZJ2, ZJ3, and ZJ4, and after the player's anxiety, the maximum number of expected balls to be displayed is recognized, which is common to the player. It can make you feel excited. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect ZJ-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one effect of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a second display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot pattern and informing of the jackpot,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a plurality of expected planned medium numbers, which represent the number of game media that can be obtained in the jackpot game,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying the maximum expected number of mediums that represents the maximum number of mediums that can be acquired in the jackpot game,
The fourth display effect is an effect of performing a big hit game effect during a big hit game,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed. After the third display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-1,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, among the plurality of expected acquisition medium number displays, the expected acquisition medium number display indicating the same number of media is displayed in the same manner.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the planned acquisition medium number display indicating a different number of media among the plurality of acquisition planned medium number displays is displayed in a different mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect ZJ-3,
There is a case where a fifth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of enlarging the display of the plurality of expected acquisition medium numbers,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the fourth display effect is performed after the fifth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect ZJ-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect ZJ-3 or Aspect ZJ-4,
There is a case where a sixth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect of reducing the display size of the plurality of expected acquisition media while moving the display to a predetermined position.
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the sixth display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

In the above aspect, the following may be performed.
○ The display of the number of media to be acquired will be displayed so that they overlap with each other while moving.
-The display of the number of media to be acquired is three-dimensional.

[Other modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects and effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a sparrow ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as the operation unit to be operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. .. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the select button 68. The display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 60 to 167, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment uses a display device (main display device 7, sub display device 10, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined from the above-described effect examples and/or modified examples.
Further, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a sub display device 10 in addition to the main display device 7 (display screen 7a), but the display effect of the display screen 7a of the main display device 7 is displayed on the display screen of the sub display device 10. It may be performed, or the display effect performed on the display screen of the sub display device 10 may be performed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and the modified examples, the embodiment of the aspect described above is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present embodiment can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and the present embodiment includes equivalents thereof.

1... Gaming machine 3... Gaming area 5... Board lamp 7... Main display device 10... Sub display device 9A, 9B... Hold image (hold icon)
9C... relevant hold image (hold icon)
14... 1st movable accessory 15... 2nd movable accessory 17... Large winning opening opening starting opening 20... 1st starting opening (1st entrance opening)
21... 2nd starting opening (2nd entrance)
64... Sub display screen 66... Frame lamp 81... Game control microcomputer 91... Production control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can be notified whether or not the hit,
By a look-ahead during the change, a first effect in which a specific decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed as at least one decorative design of the set of decorative designs,
After the first effect, during the change before the change corresponding to the look-ahead, the second effect in which the specific decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as all the decorative symbols of the set of decorative symbols When,
After the second presentation, during the change corresponding to the look-ahead, the image corresponding to the image represented by the specific decorative pattern is displayed without temporarily displaying the specific decorative pattern as the set of decorative patterns. And a third effect in which is displayed can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images